The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPROJECT MANUAL - 22-00039 - Rexburg Idaho LDS Temple - Remodel PROJECT MANUAL Rexburg Idaho Temple Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel Temple Project No: 50007052019010 Architect’ Project No: 220038 Rexburg, Idaho PREPARED FOR: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 017020 - AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION SECTION 017030 - EXECUTION SECTION 017310 - CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 017810 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 072116 - BLANKET AND ACCOUSTICAL INSULATION SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS SECTION 097516 - STONE BASE SECTION 097519 - STONE TRIM SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099300 - STAINING & TRANSPARENT FINISHING SECTION 099600 - CHEMICAL RESISTANT COATINGS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 220523 – DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING NAD EQUIPMENT SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HVAC SECTION 230000 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230100 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SECTION 230205 – DEMOLITION SECTION 230523 – VALVES SECTION 230529 – MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 230548 – MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL SECTION 230553 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING SECTION 230700 – MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 230810 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 232000 – GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS SECTION 232113 – HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 232500 – CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT & EQUIPMENT SECTION 233100 – DUCTWORK SECTION 233300 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 233616 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233713 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS DIVISION 25 – CONTROLS SECTION 255100 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 259500 – BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SECTION 260500 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260510 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SECTION 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BOUNDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260544 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING SECTION 260548.16 – SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262816 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 265113 – INTERIOR LUMINAIRES DIVISION 27 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SECTION 270000 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 017020 - AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION SECTION 017030 - EXECUTION SECTION 017310 - CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 017810 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 072116 - BLANKET AND ACCOUSTICAL INSULATION SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS SECTION 097516 - STONE BASE SECTION 097519 - STONE TRIM SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099300 - STAINING & TRANSPARENT FINISHING SECTION 099600 - CHEMICAL RESISTANT COATINGS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 220523 – DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING NAD EQUIPMENT SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HVAC SECTION 230000 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230100 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SECTION 230205 – DEMOLITION SECTION 230523 – VALVES SECTION 230529 – MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 230548 – MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL SECTION 230553 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING SECTION 230700 – MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 230810 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 232000 – GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS SECTION 232113 – HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SECTION 232500 – CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT & EQUIPMENT SECTION 233100 – DUCTWORK SECTION 233300 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 233616 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233713 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS DIVISION 25 – CONTROLS SECTION 255100 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 259500 – BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SECTION 260500 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260510 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SECTION 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BOUNDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 22003 SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260544 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING SECTION 260548.16 – SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262816 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 265113 – INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 01 October 2021 SUMMARY 011000 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 ZSECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Work covered by the Contract Documents. 1. Type of the Contract. 2. Work under other contracts. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Use of premises. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification formats and conventions. Related Sections include the following: Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for the Work. 8. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Project Identification: Rexburg Idaho Temple, confirmation & initiatory Renovations Project Location: 750 South 2nd East, Rexburg, ID 83440 Owner: The Office of the Presiding Bishop of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Special Projects Division 50 East North Temple Street, 10th Floor Salt Lake City, UT 84150 01 October 2021 SUMMARY 011000 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Owner's Representative: Allan Christean 801.240.9514 (office) Architect: Design West Architects 1. 255 South 300 West 2. Logan, UT 84321 3. Contact: Ryan Lemon 4. 435-932-6231 (office) 5. 435-764-2607 (cell) 1.4 The Work consists of the following: A. Renovating the confirmation area and adjacent mechanical area to add an additional Confirmation Room. Relocation of the First Aid Room. B. Renovation of the of both the Men’s and Women’s locker rooms to accommodate one additional instruction room in each locker room. C. Retiling the Baptismal Font. Replacing select doors and jambs in Baptismal area. 1.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS Owner will furnish products as indicated in the drawings. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 2. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 3. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 01 October 2021 SUMMARY 011000 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 4. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 6. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 1.8 USE OF PREMISES General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, other building occupants, guests, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS On-Site Work Hours: TBD. Weekend Hours: TBD 1. Early Morning Hours: TBD 2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: TBD 3. Hours for Core Drilling and other noisy activities: TBD Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify Architect, on site Building Manager, and Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 4. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect, on site Building Manager, and Owner written permission. 01 October 2021 SUMMARY 011000 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Nonsmoking Site: Smoking is not permitted within the site property fence or within 25 feet of entrances. 1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 01 October 2021 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 01 October 2021 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms as approved by Architect and Owner. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or on Architect¢s standard change order form. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 01 October 2021 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, Submittals Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 01 October 2021 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 5th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 01 October 2021 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 01 October 2021 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. C. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 2 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. s. First aid. t. Security. u. Progress cleaning. v. Working hours. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modifications." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 01 October 2021 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for preparing a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. D. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals. 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial and Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 2 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Equipment at Project site. 3. Material deliveries. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Services connected and disconnected. 10. Equipment or system tests and startups. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation[ on CSI Form 13.2A]. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 01 October 2021 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 01 October 2021 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project record documents at Project closeout. 3. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For photographer. B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: 01 October 2021 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. 1.5 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 01 October 2021 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation and starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag excavation areas and construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly or as appropriate to show major portions of construction, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. 1. Do not include date stamp. H. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. 01 October 2021 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. e. Owner's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION 013233 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. G. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will[ not] be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810, CSI Form 12.1A or similar. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked approved. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approved taken by Architect. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Contractor must agree to and sign electronic release agreement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. 4. Number of Copies: Submit 5 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit four full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit four copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 01 October 2021 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally page] 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. J. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified [testing agency] [special inspector] as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 01 October 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA Architectural Precast Association APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI AWCI International 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The) BICSI BICSI BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA Canadian Standards Association CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) CSI Cast Stone Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ESD ESD Association FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HI Hydronics Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association HPW C. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIA Security Industry Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) WIC Woodwork Institute of California 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association D. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) E. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service F. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards G. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation CCR California Code of Regulations CPUC California Public Utilities Commission TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 01 October 2021 REFERENCES 014200 - 14 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." B. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of [8] <Insert number> at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire departments, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Owner's office, Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail in field office. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 3. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. H. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule. 3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Weather strip openings. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure & construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 01 October 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, as well as Substitution Procedures apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 2. Divisions 02 thru 49 for specific requirements for warranties on products and installation specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design," including make or model 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed list: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selection and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, dose not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Owner. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses or architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for th Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Summ. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Provide side by side comparison of specified product and comparable product. Comparable product 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 requests that do not provide a side by side comparison will be rejected. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between the contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store/protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 thru 49 for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Products: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Par 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 9. Visual matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color,k pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action,k except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 01 October 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 01 October 2021 AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION 017020 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01702 Ó AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESIGNATED CONSTRUCTION Certain walls of the building construction on the project are designated airtight (leak-proof) for the purposes of sound isolation, including, but not limited to the walls for the following rooms: A. A Room B. B room See the wall types and details for additional identification of airtight walls. 1. DESCRIPTION C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Where construction is designated airtight, all details for airtightness that are appropriate shall be employed. The responsibility for airtight construction shall fall on the general contractor and all subcontractors. All work between trades must be coordinated in the field to insure that airtightness is achieved where scheduled or required. E. Every precaution shall be taken to maintain construction completely airtight around construction that is designated airtight. Construction joints, structural penetrations, mechanical and electrical duct penetrations, pipe and conduit penetrations, electrical boxes and fixtures, cabinets, doors, access panels, windows, frames, supports, etc. all shall be built and installed in such manner as to prevent sound transmission. Provide lintels, extra frames, blocking, escutcheons, grouting, gaskets, packing, caulking, dense putties, taping, filling, etc. as required to stop sound transmission. 1. Applicable Standards, Requirements, Details, and Products F. ASTM E497 (Standard Practice for Installing Sound-Isolating Lightweight Partitions). G. ASTM C919 (Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications). H. Specific requirements listed below. I. Details and products in the project documents. 01 October 2021 AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION 017020 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Airtight construction requirements for the project included (but are not limited to) the following: J. Partition Bases: Provide 1/4" (high) continuous bead of acoustical sealant at all locations where gypsum board meets structural flooring. The depth of the sealant shall equal the thickness of the gypsum layer or layers. K. Partition Heads: Provide the same detail as for bases at flat structure. Provide details in the project drawings for other conditions. L. Partition or Ceiling Joints at Dissimilar Materials: Provide 1/4" continuous bead of acoustical sealant at all locations where gypsum board meets dissimilar material. The depth of the sealant shall equal the thickness of the gypsum layer or layers. M. Partition/Partition or Partition/Ceiling Joints: Provide standard corner taping detail. N. Pipe, Duct, Conduit, or Structural Penetrations: Provide 1/4" wide bead of acoustical sealant around perimeter of small penetrating elements with controlled openings. Provide details in the project drawings for other conditions. The depth of the sealant shall equal the thickness of the gypsum layer or layers. O. Electrical Boxes 4"x 4" or Under: Provide 1/4" wide bead of acoustical sealant around perimeters of electrical boxes. The depth of the sealant shall equal the thickness of the gypsum layer or layers. Provide sheet caulking continuously around the back side of boxes. P. Electrical, Lighting, or Other Recessed Boxes Over 4"x 4": Provide one layer of 5/8" gypsum board continuous around the back of such boxes. Caulk or tape all joints and caulk all conduit penetrations with acoustical sealant. 1. DETAILS AND PRODUCTS Representative details for airtight penetrations, recessed elements, edges, etc. are shown in the project drawings. The product specification below designates specific materials and components to be used to accomplish airtight detailing. The Contractor shall be alert for conditions that may require special details or materials in order to achieve airtightness and shall bring these to the attention of the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Low-Density Glass Fiber Insulation Long-strand glass fiber insulation of 1- to 2-pcf density, without covering, thickness as required for packing and filling small joints and openings behind sealants. Acceptable products are as follows: A. Aerocor by Owens-Corning Fiberglas. B. Microlite by Johns Manville. C. Ultralite by CertainTeed. 2.2 HIGH-DENSITY CERAMIC OR MINERAL FIBER SAFING Long-strand ceramic or mineral fiber insulation of minimum 6-pcf density, without covering, 01 October 2021 AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION 017020 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 thickness as required for packing and filling large and/or critical openings, usually behind a sealant or putty. Acceptable products are as follows: A. Fiberfrax by Standard Oil Engineered Materials, Fibers Division. B. Thermafiber by U.S. Gypsum. 2.3 General Purpose Acoustical Sealant Long-lasting, permanently-flexible sealant with excellent adhesion for closing small openings and joints up to a maximum of 1" wide. Sealant backed with glass fiber packing, compressible joint filler or resilient backer rod. Acceptable products are as follows: A. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco. A black synthetic rubber material suitable for concealed locations only. B. Acoustical Sealant by U.S. Gypsum. A white water base material suitable for exposed or concealed locations, but not waterproof. C. Sound Sealant by Ohio Sealants. A white water base or rubber base sealant suitable for concealed locations. 2.4 Fire-Barrier Putty Non-shrinking, highly-adhesive, minimum 40-pcf density fire-barrier putty for closing large openings and joints typically over 1" wide. Applied full depth or backed with a dense safing, as detailed. Acceptable products are as follows: A. CP 25N/S No Sag or CP25S/L Self Leveling Fire Barrier Caulk by 3M Electrical Products Division. B. Type FSP Firestop Putty by Nelson Electric Division of General Signal. C. Fyre Putty by Standard Oil Engineering Materials Company, Fibers Division. 2.5 FOAMED-IN-PLACE SILICONE SEALANT Fire-resistant, minimum 17-pcf density, foamed-in-place silicone sealant for closing electrical ducts and cable trays where they penetrate constructions. Will expand and fill around and between separated cables. Usually applied full depth of construction between permanent or temporary dams. Acceptable product is 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam by Dow Corning. 2.6 Sheet Caulking (Electrical Outlet Box Pads) Polybutene-butyl or equal fire-resistant pads with inert fillers, 1/4" x 4" x 8" or 1/8" x 6" x 8" in size for sealing the backs and sides of standard electrical back boxes. Available in sheets or pads of standard sizes. A. Outlet Box Pads by Harry A. Lowry & Associates. B. Type FSP Firestop Putty Pads by Nelson Electric. 2.7 FELT-LINED METAL SLEEVES Sheet metal sleeve with felt lining for implementing a seal around a pipe, hanger rod or other round element penetrating a construction. Inside sleeve diameter to equal outside diameter of penetrating element. Exposed end of sleeve closed with acoustical sealant. Acceptable products are as follows: A. Pipe Isolator by Eleen. B. P-R Isolator by Potter-Roemer. C. Trisolator by Stoneman Engineering. 2.8 Self-Adhesive Bubble Gaskets Nominal 1/4" x 1/2" compressible bulb of silicone rubber or polypropylene with self-adhesive on one side for providing an acoustical seal around the edge of an operating access panels. Typically 01 October 2021 AIRTIGHT CONSTRUCTION FOR SOUND ISOLATION 017020 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 set on jamb or head frame or stop to act as a compression seal. Acceptable products are as follows: A. PF 181 by National Guard Products. B. S88D or S88W Siliconseal by Pemko. C. 797 or 797W by Reese Enterprises. D. 10-5050 Doubleguard by Stanley Hardware. E. WS176 by Ultra Industries. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE Prior to the start of installation of the Work of this Section, convene a pre-installation conference under provisions specified elsewhere. The Contractor and all subcontractors and trades responsible for Work in this Section shall be present to review areas of potential interference and conflict and to review the requirements for airtight construction to see that airtightness is achieved where scheduled or required. 3.2 INSTALLATION The following is required for all construction which is designated airtight. A. Extend construction to a minimum of 1/8" and a maximum of 1/2" of adjacent construction or penetrations to provide a suitable space for packing and caulking. B. Cut openings in construction accurately for electrical boxes, piping, ductwork and other penetrating elements. Leave enough space around such elements so they remain free of rigid connection with the surrounding construction. C. Prior to packing and caulking penetrations as detailed herein, verify that all penetrating elements such as piping and ductwork are free and clear of the opening to be packed and caulked. D. Where multiple layers of gypsum board are used, stagger all joints in adjacent layers a minimum of 24". E. Apply all acoustical sealants and caulks in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 01702 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 0170300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General Installation of Products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0113100 "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. The Contractor is to coordinate with the Owner's representative. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inchesin spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 01 October 2021 EXECUTION 017030 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 01 October 2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. C. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 01 October 2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 01 October 2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete & Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 01 October 2021 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. E. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 01 October 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 01 October 2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 01 October 2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017810 01 October 2021 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems and equipment. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manual: Submit three copies of each manual in final form at least 7 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 7 days of receipt of Architect's comments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for [fire] [flood] [gas leak] [water leak] [power failure] [water outage] [equipment failure] [and] [chemical release or spill]. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment: D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training videotape if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures: E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017820 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. B. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For instructor. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. E. Demonstration and Training Videos: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. F. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording. f. Describe vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point) and elevation or story of construction. 2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors. 2. Equipment, including loading dock equipment, waste compactors, and or food-service equipment. 3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems. 4. Intrusion detection systems. 5. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, condensers, pumps and distribution piping. 6. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices. 7. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 8. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. 9. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches. 10. Lighting equipment and controls. 11. Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data and television equipment. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017820 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 01 October 2021 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written and demonstration performance-based test. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 017900 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Perform Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings preconstruction photographs preconstruction videotapes and templates. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Building manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Concrete, Tile on Surface: Remove tile setting bed without damaging the suspended concrete slab or the slab on grade. Notify architect and engineer of any damage occurs. 01 October 2021 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior trim, mouldings. 2. Shelving. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) 1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. C. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish woodwork as described in Contract Documents B. Transitions from Transparent to Opaque Finishes 1. Doors to rooms having opaque finishes shall have their veneers specified for clear finishes but shall be painted on one side. 2. Casings, jambs, and stops shall receive finishes to match wood on wall or in room of which they are part. 3. Transition between opaque and clear finishes shall be made at stop with edge of stop being finished to match room it faces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical- treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings to Architect indicating component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors 2. Include construction, fastening, and application details C. Samples for Verification: 1. Transparent finished wood a. Solid Stock 1) Submit two samples of ¾” x 4” x 18” for each wood species specified to receive clear finish with approved stain and finish in accordance with Architect approved control sample. (Sample is existing original clear finished trim from temple) 2) Step finish samples at 3” intervals, progressing from raw, finish sanded wood through each succeeding application of sealer or washcoat if required) stain and finish coats, for Architect’s approval of finish process and final finish. b. Veneer Panel 1) Submit two samples of 8-1/2” x 18” for each species specified to receive clear finish on ½” or ¾” MDF core with approved stain and finish in accordance with Architect approved control sample. 2) Step finish samples at 2” intervals, starting at bottom of panel (8-1/2” width and 11” height) progressing from raw, finish sanded veneer face through each succeeding application of sealer (or washcoat if required) stain and finish coats, for Architect’s approval of finish process and final finish. 2. Opaque finished wood a. Solid Stock 1) Submit two samples of ¾” x 4” x 18” for each wood species specified with approved opaque finish applied in accordance with Architect approved control sample. (Sample is existing opaque finished trim from temple) 2) Step finish samples at 3” intervals, progressing from raw, finish sanded wood, to primer, to each of two applications of opaque (paint) finish. b. Veneer Panel 1) Submit two samples of ¾” x 8-1/2” x 18” panel with approved opaque finish (paint) applied in accordance with Architect approved control sample. 2) Step finish samples at 2” intervals, starting at bottom of panel (8-1/2” width and 11” height) progressing from raw, finish sanded veneer face, to primer, to each of two applications of opaque 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 (paint) finish. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Fabricator Qualifications a. Fabrication and finishing shall be performed by pre-approved Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer who has been pre-approved 2. Installer Qualifications a. Installation of Architectural Woodwork shall be performed by Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer b. When installation is to be performed by other than the fabricator, the following shall apply – 1) Installation shall be performed by personnel that have minimum five years experience installing Architectural Woodwork of comparable quality with ability to install work to meet specified standards. 2) Installers shall be approved by Architect of Owner prior to delivery of Architectural Woodwork to site. 3) Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer shall provide an on site supervisor to direct installation, final finish, and touch up of all elements of Architectural Woodwork. a) Supervisor shall be full time employee of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer with minimum five years experience installing and finishing work comparable to that specified in this section. b) Supervisor shall have authority to certify installation, final finish, and touch-up in behalf of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer. B. Requirements 1. Unless noted or specified elsewhere, Architectural Woodwork shall conform to AWI Premium Grade for materials, finish and installation. C. Certification – Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer shall be current certified member of Architectural Woodwork Institute with capabilities of shop finishing woodwork as specified. D. Pre-Installation Meeting 1. Schedule meeting after Architectural Woodwork has been delivered to the site and prior to installation. 2. Check for appropriate blocking and correct models and fasteners of substrates. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED FABRICATOR A. Mark Richey Woodworking, Attn: Mark Richey, 40 Parker Street, Newburyport, MD 01950, O:(978)499-3800, D:(978)463-7222, Email: www.markrichey.com 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress." 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. G. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 1. Color: White. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent respectively. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review. a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 6. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. 7. Application: Where indicated. 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply with testing requirements; testing by a qualified testing agency. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent respectively. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on exposed face. D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 2. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. F. Application: Where indicated. 2.5 INTERIOR TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish: 1. Species and Grade: Plain sawn natural hard maple, premium. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm). 5. Veneered Material: Not allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. B. Hardwood Lumber Trim and Moldings for Transparent Finish: WMMPA HWM 2, N-grade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1. 1. Species and Grade: Quarter sawn select white hard maple, premium. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color with approved sample. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 5. Patterns: See drawings. C. Moldings for Opaque Finish: 1. Hardwood Moldings: WMMPA HWM 2, P-grade. a. Species: Hard maple. b. Maximum Moisture Content at fabrication: 9 percent. 2. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 3. Patterns: See drawings. D. Allowable Defects 1. Tight knots not exceeding 1/8” in diameter. Loose knots are not permissible. 2. Very slight gum pockets, not to exceed 1/16” x 1/2”. 3. Patches (dutchmen) not apparent after finishing when viewed beyond 18”. 4. Checks or splits not exceeding 1/32” x 3” and not visible after finishing when viewed beyond 18” 5. Stains, streaks, worm holes, and other defects not mentioned are not permitted. 6. Normal grain variations, such as cats eye, bird’s eye, burl, curl, and cross grain are not considered defects. E. Length 1. Use maximum lengths as possible, but not required to exceed 10’-0” without joints. 2. No joints closer than 6’-0” in straight run. 3. No joints permitted in door casings or door moldings, (except miter joint at corners.) 2.6 SHELVING A. Exposed Closet and Utility Shelving: Made from 1. NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA; kiln dried. B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-5-1/2-inch (19-by-140-mm) boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods, as specified above for shelving, lumber trim for opaque finish, softwood lumber trim for transparent finish and hardwood lumber trim for transparent finish. C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel. D. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04041; prime-painted formed steel. E. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; powder-coat-finished steel. F. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; powder-coat-finished steel. G. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; powder-coat-finished steel. H. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091; powder-coat-finished steel. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.8 FINISHES A. General 1. Finished wood surfaces, including cabinetry, paneling and trim shall be free of runs, streaks, sags, lint, fish eyes, overspray and orange peel. 2. Match Architect approved control sample for stain color, texture, and degree of sheen. B. Transparent Finish 1. Architectural woodwork and cabinetry shall be pre-finished at the plant of Manufacturer. 2. Premium Grade – Comply with AWI Finish System TR-4 Conversion Varnish, enhanced Premium Grade as outlined. a. Finish thickness shall not exceed 5 mm. b. Staining shall be uniform, without streaks or light and dark patches. c. Finish sheen shall be satin, or 15-20 degrees on 60 degree gloss meter. d. Finish all transparent finished wood species to exactly match each other and Architect approved samples. e. All solid wood and veneers to be stained and/or toned are to match sample. C. Opaque Finish 1. Premium Grade – Comply with AWI Finish System OP-4, Conversion Varnish, enhanced Premium grade as outlined. a. Casework shall be pre-finished at the plant of the Manufacturer. 1) Finish shall include three topcoats of conversion varnish in finished color. 2) Color as selected by Architect. b. Standing and running trim and paneling shall be primed at the plant and finished on the site. 1) Factory apply two coats primer-surfacer (conversion varnish) applied at manufacturer’s facilities. 2) After installation of standing and running trim and paneling is completed, sand with 220 grit paper and apply three topcoats of conversion varnish in finished color. a) Color as selected by Architect. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b) Application of finish coats shall be by Architectural Woodwork fabricator. 3) Finish sheen shall be satin, or 15-20 degrees on 60 degree gloss meter. D. Visual Tests Applicable to Exposed Surfaces 1. Premium Grade – Finished and installed Architectural Woodwork shall be tested as follows with specified results – a. Finish Sanding Scratches – Not permitted b. Orange Peel (Slight depressions in surface, similar to skin of an orange) – Not permitted c. Runs (Running of wet finish films in rivulets) – Not permitted d. Sags (Partial slipping of finish film creating “curtain” effect) – Not permitted e. Blistering (Small, swelled areas like water blisters on human skin) – Not permitted f. Blushing – Not permitted g. Checking, Crazing (Crowfeet separation or irregular line separation) – Not permitted h. Cracking (Formation like dried mud) – Not permitted i. Glue spots, putty spots, or smears – Not permitted j. Filled finish brad or screw holes 1) Not permitted on free-standing woodwork 2) Not noticeable beyond 36” on installed woodwork k. Field Repairs and Touch-ups – Not noticeable beyond 18” 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on job site. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. C. Fabricate so veneer grain is vertical. D. Join members by pressure process glue and lemon splines, or pressure glue and dowels. E. Finish Tolerances – 1. No planer or molder marks (KPCI) or sanding chatter allowed. 2. Sand all wood members and surfaces to 220 grit. 3. Maximum Gap – None allowed. 4. Flushness Variation – 0.010” maximum. 5. Cross Sanding Scratches – None allowed. 6. Compatibility of grain and color from solid stock to panel products is required. 7. Blind nail where clear finish wood is used. 8. Plug or fill screw and nail holes. Screw and nail locations not to be visible beyond 36”. F. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions. Leave operating hardware operating smoothly and quietly. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 G. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. 2. Wood-board paneling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Architectural Woodwork shall be installed after ceilings, plumbing, flooring, and other related trades have completed their work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation standards for Architectural Woodwork shall be AWI Premium. B. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. C. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth. B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Use 2 fasteners at each framing member or fastener location for cleats 4 inches nominal (89 mm actual) in width and wider. 1. Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf cleats before installing. Remove adhesive that is squeezed out after fastening shelf cleats in place. C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches (800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. D. Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. E. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. and within 6 inches (150 mm) of end 01 October 2021 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 of shelves. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. F. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 1. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural wood cabinets. 3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings or AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished cabinets. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge. 4. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Glass. 4. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or a Licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical architectural wood cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of architectural wood cabinets with sequence-matched wood veneers wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork. 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI or WI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium B. Type of Construction: Face frame. C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Reveal overlay. D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Species and Grade: Select White Hard Maple, Premium Grade 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn. 3. Grain Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts. 4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. 6. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. 7. Exposed shelving shall be constructed to match cabinet doors. E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2 inch (3 mm) Baltic Birch or Apple plywood. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. F. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Pulls and knobs: To be selected by Architect. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1: Side mounted full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. F. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Satin nickel plated, clear coated: BHMA 619 for brass, bronze base. H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field finishing opaque- finished architectural woodwork. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Back-priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match existing trim. 5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 6. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 7. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back-priming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). 01 October 2021 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior ornamental woodwork. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing ornamental woodwork items that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" Section 061052 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing ornamental woodwork that are concealed within other construction before ornamental woodwork installation. 2. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections, to ensure that interior ornamental woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agri-fiber products. 2. Finishing materials and processes. 3. Wood-Preservative Treatment: 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Include data and warranty from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials to comply with requirements. b. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. c. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material and manufacturer's written warranty. 4. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials to comply with requirements. 5. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, Include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. 2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material. 3. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 4. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, including the following: 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. 2. Attachment devices, and other components. 3. Show large-scale details. 4. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 5. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 6. Apply AWI Quality Certification WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each shop-applied color and finish specified. 1. Size: a. Panel Products: 12 inches by 12 inches. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b. Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of shop-applied exposed finish. 1. Size: a. Panel Products: 12 inches by 12 inches. b. Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. F. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for Exterior Wood-Stain Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species, with one-half of exposed surface finished. 2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished ornamental woodwork. 3. Lumber and Panel Products with Shop-Applied Opaque Finish: 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished. a. Finish exposed surface. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program WI's Certified Compliance Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program Licensed participant in WI's Certified Compliance Program. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations by Change Order. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2. B. Do not deliver interior ornamental woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. C. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1. Handle and store fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior ornamental woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish is to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupancy for the remainder of the construction period. C. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. D. Field Measurements: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. E. Established Dimensions: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that ornamental woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of ornamental woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the Architectural Woodwork Standards. Comply with Contract Documents and Architectural Woodwork Standards. 2.2 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior ornamental work for opaque finish includes the following: 1. Crown Molding 2. Chair rail. 3. Base Molding. 4. Door Casing B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species 1. Plain sawn natural hard maple below 7'. Trims never reachable can be popular or birch. D. Grade: Grade 1 Lumber E. Length 1. Use maximum length possible 2. Running trim in 10' lengths minimum 3. No joints within 3' of a corner 4. No joints permitted in door casings or moldings, except miter joints at corners. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Wood Moisture Content: 6-8% percent. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for each type of ornamental woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert value> percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior , medium-density overlay. 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. a. Panel Source International, Inc. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners. B. Nails: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70. D. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233. E. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM A 307 with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers all hot-dip zinc coated. F. Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 G. Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide solid blocking behind all wood trims, crown molding, baseboards, and pilasters. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, Hanging Strips, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative treated , fire-retardant treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1. Wood-Preservative Treatment: By pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. a. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. c. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements; C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate ornamental woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times ornamental woodwork fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. a. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. b. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition ornamental woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. B. Before installing ornamental woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including removing packing and backpriming concealed surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install ornamental woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Assemble ornamental woodwork, and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during shop fabrication. C. Install ornamental woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut ornamental woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. G. Standing and Running Trim 1. Fastening points chall be concealed, filled, and finished to blend with adjacent finished woodwork. 2. Install maximum lengths possible with joint buttes and reinforce with lamellos. 3. Attach base moldings and chair rails to walls with continuous concealed cleats. All cleats and crown molding shall be glued and attached to framing members without the need of continuous backing inside the wall assembly. 4. Finish brads may be used to reinforce chair rail attachment only if used sparingly and if concealed in underside crevice of molding panel. 5. Glue crown molding to blocking or, if necessary, attach with finish brads or screws in crevice of molding profile. ?. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL H. Inspections: Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program WI's Certified Compliance Program certifying that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. 1. Inspection entity shall prepare and submit report of inspection. 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair damaged and defective ornamental woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior ornamental woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. 01 October 2021 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective Work. C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of ornamental woodwork. 1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. D. Field Finish: See Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for final finishing of installed ornamental woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. END OF SECTION 064400 01 October 2021 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 072116 BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install acoustic batt insulation in metal framing as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Insulation shall be manufactured to be in compliance with International Code Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Insulation: a. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Certainteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com. 2) FiberTEK, Salt Lake City, UT www.fibertekinsulation.com. 3) Guardian Fiberglass, Greer, SC www.guardianbp.com. 4) Johns Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com. 5) Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knaufusa.com. 6) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH www.owens-corning.com. 7) Thermafiber, Wabash, IL www.thermafiber.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. B. Materials: 1. Thermal And Acoustic Insulation: a. Faced Insulation: 1) Kraft faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type II, Class C. 2) Foil faced meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type III. a) Class B: Enclosed insulation. b. Unfaced Insulation: Meet requirements of ASTM C665, Type I. c. Order insulation by 'R' factor rather than 'U' factor, rating, or thickness, either 16 or 24 inches (400 or 600 mm) wide according to framing spacing. d. 'R' Factor Required: 01 October 2021 BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1) Metal Wall Stud Framing: R11 3-1/2 inches deep R19 5-1/2 inches deep R26 7-1/2 inches deep PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Correct existing insulation at exposed wall cavities. 2. Leave no gaps in insulation envelope. 3. If two layers of insulation are used to attain required 'R' factor, only layer towards interior of building shall have facing. 4. Provide minimum clearance around recessed lighting fixtures as approved by local code. 5. Maintain existing wall fire ratings by augmenting existing fire resistant materials as required. B. In Framing: 1. Install insulation behind plumbing and wiring, around duct and vent line penetrations, and in similar places. 2. Fit ends of batts snug against top and bottom plates. 3. Fit batts snug against stud framing at each side. 4. Where insulation is not enclosed by structure or drywall, support in place with wire or other suitable material. 5. Install baffles between trusses and rafters at ventilation spaces if necessary to prevent insulation from blocking airflow from soffit. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 07 9219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of sealants to be used at perimeters of and penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and associated ceilings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. “Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants”. 2. ASM International: a. “Adhesives and Sealants”, Volume 3, ASM International Handbook Committee, May 1999. b. Committee C24 on Building Seals and Sealants for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant specifying and application. c. Committee E6 on Building Performance for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant use with air barriers, vapor retarders, and exterior enclosure systems and materials. 3. The Adhesive and Sealing Council, Inc. (ASC) / Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWR Institute): a. “Sealants: The Professional’s Guide”. b. “Joint Sealants, Whole Building Design Guide”. B. Definitions: 1. Adhesion: Bonding forces between two different materials (e.g. between an adhesive and substrate). 2. Adhesive: An adhesive, as defined by The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), is “a substance capable of holding materials together by surface attachment“. 3. Adhesive Failure: Loss of adhesion between adhesive and substrate. Adhesive pulls cleanly away from substrate. 4. Caulk: Caulks have a variety of definitions but are generally recognized as materials used in applications where only minor elastomeric properties are needed. 5. Primer: Coating applied to surface, prior to application of an adhesive, to improve performance of bond. 6. Sealant. Sealants are generally used in applications where elastic properties are needed while adhesives are generally used in applications where bonding strength and rigidity are needed. With technology advancements both sealants and adhesives can be used interchangeably depending on the applications performance requirements. 7. Sealant Types and Classes: a. Federal Specifications: 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1) Type I: Self-leveling, pour grade. 2) Type II: Non-sag, gun grade. 3) Type NS: Non-sag, gun grade. 4) Class A: +25 percent, -25 percent expansion – contraction. b. ASTM Specifications: 1) Type S: Single-component sealant. 2) Type M: Multi-component sealant. 3) Grade P: Pourable or self-leveling sealant for joints on horizontal surfaces. 4) Grade NS: Non-sag or gunnable sealant for joints in vertical surfaces. 5) Class 25: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 25 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. 6) Class 12: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 12 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. 7) T: Sealant designed for use in joints in pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas such as walkways, plazas, decks and parking garages. 8) NT: Sealant designed for use in joints in non-traffic areas. 9) M: Sealant will remain adhered to mortar. 10) G: Sealant will remain adhered to glass. 11) A: Sealant will remain adhered to aluminum. 12) O: Sealant will remain adhered to substrates other than glass, aluminum, mortar. 8. Shelf Life: Usable storage time of material. Most adhesives have shelf-life of 6 to 12 months. Shelf-life of an adhesive may be increased by refrigeration and is usually shortened by exposure to heat. 9. Stability: Compound in original unopened container shall be stable for at least six months when stored at temperature not exceeding 80 degrees F. (26.7 degrees C.). 10. Toxicity: Material shall have no adverse effect on health of personnel when used for its intended purpose. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C834-10, ‘Standard Specification for Latex Sealants’. b. ASTM C919-12, 'Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications'. c. ASTM C1193-12, ‘Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants'. d. ASTM E84-12c, ‘Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials’. e. ASTM E90-09, ‘Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements’ 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: a. UL 723: ‘Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Tenth Edition September 10 2008.’ (Revision: September 13, 2010).’ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature for each Product. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer’s Certificate: 1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 2. Manufacturers’ Instructions: a. Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: a. Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Type 1. 1) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke-developed index 0-450). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. 2. Inspect for damage or deteriorated materials. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage. 2. Store in cool, dry location, and at temperatures never under 40 deg F (4 deg C) nor exceeding 80 deg F (26.7 C). 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not apply caulking at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sealants: 1. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C834. b. Meet Class A flame spread rating. 2. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Draft & Acoustical Sound Sealant by OSI Sealants Inc, Mentor, OH www.osisealants.com. 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b. QuietZone Acoustic Caulk by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscorning.com. c. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco, Beachwood, OH www.tremcosealants.com or Toronto, ON (800) 363-3213. d. Acoustical Sound Sealant by Titebond e. Acoustical Sealant by U S Gypsum, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by Sealant Manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Backing: 1. Flexible closed cell polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed. 2. Oversized 25 to 50 percent larger than joint width. C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by Sealant Manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. D. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by Sealant Manufacturer to suit application. E. Primer: Non-staining type, type, recommended by Sealant Manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive Work. 2. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf-life requirements. 3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare joints in accordance with ASTM C1193 and Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Clean joint surfaces to remove dirt, dust, oils, wax, paints, and other contamination capable of affecting primer and sealant bond. 3. Protect elements surrounding the Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. Apply masking tape to adjacent surfaces when required to prevent damage to finishes from sealant installation. B. Surface Preparation: 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Remove existing sealants where specified. 2. Clean joint surfaces of residual sealant and other contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface. 3. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials. 2. Install primer and sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and Manufacturer’s instructions where required for sealant adhesion. 3. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation. 4. Do not apply caulking/sealant at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). B. Joint Backing: 1. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) deep. 2. Apply bond-breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer. C. Install at perimeter joints and mechanical and electrical penetrations in sound insulated rooms. Apply sealant with hand-caulking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint. D. Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate or to achieve smooth sealant surface. E. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) maximum, but never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Examine sealant joints to verify compliance with Contract Document requirements. B. Non-Conforming Work. Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Sealant material found to be contaminated or damaged or inadequate preparation of substrate results in deficiencies in joint sealant adhesion is considered defective or not complying with Contract Document requirements. 2. Correct any work found defective or not-complying with Contract Document requirements at no additional cost to Owner. 3.5 CLEANING A. General: 1. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accordance with Sealant Manufacturer and 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Substrate Manufacturer recommendations as work progresses. 2. Remove masking tape and any other foreign material. 3. Clean adjacent materials that have been soiled immediately (before setting) as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Waste Management: Dispose of products in accordance with Sealant Manufacturer’s recommendation. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 BLANK PAGE 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Priming Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. 4. Prehanging doors in frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include details of construction. 2. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Undercuts. 4. Requirements for veneer matching. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Interior Doors: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Regional Materials: Wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. C. Regional Materials: Wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site. D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. E. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." F. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. G. Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." H. Panel Products: Any of the following unless otherwise indicated: 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. 3. Medium-density fiberboard, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 4. Hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4. 5. Veneer-core plywood. I. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 2.3 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Interior custom doors complying with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 2. Panel Designs: Indicated on Drawings. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 3. Grade: Premium . 4. Finish: Transparent Opaque. 5. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine, plain sawed/sliced Douglas fir or western hemlock, quarter sawed/sliced (vertical grain) Red oak, quarter sawed/sliced stiles and rails, plain sawed/sliced panels Species indicated in schedule, plain sawed/sliced Insert species and cut. 6. Door Construction for Opaque Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear softwood; may be edge glued for width and finger jointed. b. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered edge- and end-glued lumber. 7. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated. a. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 6". b. Bottom Rails: 8". 8. Raised-Panel Thickness: 1-3/4 inches . 9. Flat-Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch. 10. Molding Profile (Sticking): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 11. Provide AWI Quality Certification WI Certified Compliance Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 12. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6A and grade specified. 2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. F. Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors complete with frames, weather stripping, and hardware. 1. Provide hardware that complies with Section 087100 "Door Hardware. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.6 FINISHING A. Site finish doors for consistency. See finish schedule for scheduled paint. B. Finish wood doors at woodworking shop where indicated in schedules or on Drawings. C. For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and fillers may be omitted on[ top and] bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081433 01 October 2021 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 6) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection 0.0179 inch . c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks. a. Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 7) Telling Industries. 8) Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements 0.0147 inch. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; Deflex Clips. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; FTC3FTC5. 3) Fire Trak Corp; PosiKlipRediKlip. 4) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 5) Super Stud Building Products Inc.; Deflection Clips. 6) Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 3. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2). 2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection TrackSLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 4) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection TrackSlotted Deflecto Track. 5) Metal-Lite; The System. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiClip SLDVertiTrack VTD. 7) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip TrackVertical Slip Track II. 8) Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0269 inch. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-1/2 inches Insert depth. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0179 inch 0.0296 inch 0.0329 inch Insert thickness. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 7/8 inch 1-1/2 inches. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2. Configuration: Asymmetrical hat shaped. I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 3/4 inch Insert depth. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0329 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 AC193 AC58 AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor torque-controlled, adhesive anchor adhesive anchor. c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 Group 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated Insert size. E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. G. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0179 inch 0.0269 inch 0.0296 inch 0.0329 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-5/8 inches 2-1/2 inches 3-5/8 inches. H. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0147 inch 0.0190 inch Insert thickness. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-5/8 inches 2-1/2 inches 3-5/8 inches. I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0179 inch 0.0296 inch 0.0329 inch Insert thickness. J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical hat shaped. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 K. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension 650/670 Fire Rated Drywall Ceiling Suspension Radius Drywall Ceiling Suspension SpanFast Drywall Ceiling Suspension for Corridors. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System Wall-to-Wall Drywall Suspension System. d. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z-Shaped Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced Insert dimension o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: Insert dimension o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Insert dimension o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Insert dimension o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. 01 October 2021 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. 2. Product Certificates: For materials manufactured within 100 milesm) of Proicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each raw material. 3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives and sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For ceiling and wall materials, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. B. Ceiling and wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. h. USG Corporation. i. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. h. USG Corporation. i. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc Plastic Paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. d. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Insert requirements for Class II anodic finishes and factory-painted, baked-enamel finishes. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC. b. Franklin International. c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Specified Technologies, Inc. g. USG Corporation. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 h. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 3: Mechanical, Electrical, and building support spaces not accessed by patrons|or temple workers. 2. Level 4: Under all wall coverings, not including Giclee mural 3. Level 5: All locations included Giclee mural. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 01 October 2021 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Glazed wall tile. 4. Stone thresholds. 5. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications. 6. Crack isolation membrane. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 071326 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" Section 071353 "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing" Section 071354 "Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing" Section 071413 "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing" Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing under thickset mortar beds. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Section 092400 "Cement Plastering" for scratch coat for thickset mortar setting-bed installations. 4. Section 092613 "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for cementitious backer units. 5. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units. 6. Section 093023 "Glass Mosaic Tiling." 7. Section 093033 "Stone Tiling." 8. Section 093500 "Chemical-Resistant Tiling." 9. Section 096340 "Stone Flooring" for stone thresholds. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealers, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3. Installer employs only Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers for Project. 4. Installer employs at least one installer for Project that has completed the Advanced Certification for Tile Installers (ACT) certification for installation of gauged porcelain tile/gauged porcelain tile panels and slabs. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile shown in the finish schedule. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Provide products and specified and detailed on the finish schedule in the drawings. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503/C503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 12 according to ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241/C241M and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Manufacturer: MAPEI. 1. Product: Mapelastic Turbo Membrane 2. Install the membrane as per the manufacturer’s recommendations and as per TCNA P602-16. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Bonding Mortar: 1. Manufacturer: MAPEI. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Products: a. UltraflexTM 2 b. AdesilexTM P10 3. Install bonding mortar per glass tile manufacturer recommendations. B. Screed Mortar: 1. Manufacturer: MAPEI. 2. Product: Planitop 330 Fast 3. Install screed mortar per glass tile manufacturer recommendations. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: MAPEI 2. Product: Kerapoxy CQ Epoxy Grout 3. Color: As indicated in Finish Schedule 4. Prepare grout as per manufacturer instructions. 5. Install grout as per glass tile manufacturer instructions. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. C. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Jamo Inc. d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. Insert manufacturer's name. 2. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 3. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 4. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. 5. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 6. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile swimming pool decks. c. Tile floors in laundries. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/8 inch. 3. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SETTING MATERIALS A. Install setting materials according to manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Install waterproof membrane to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow waterproof membrane to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.9 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F115; thin-set mortar; epoxy grout. a. Ceramic Tile Type: See Drawings b. Thin-set Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Font Installation, watertight concrete: 1. Glass Tile Installation : TCNA P602-16 a. Glass Tile Type: See Drawings b. Thin-set Mortar: See sections above c. Watertight concrete: See specification 099600. d. Grout: See sections above for epoxy grout e. Crack Isolation: See sections above for membrane f. Expansion: Comply with TCNA – EJ171G. Sealant to be continuous around the perimeter of the font between the coping and top of the tile. END OF SECTION 093013 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 BLANK PAGE 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Type IV – Mineral Fiber base with membrane-faced overlay, Pattern E 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong ULTIMA Lay- In: 1910A or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, Mineral base with membrane-faced overlay. Form 2, Water felted. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.85. E. NRC: Not less than 0.75. F. CAC: Not less than 20. G. AC: Not less than 170. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. I. Thickness: 3/4 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. c. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-) diameter wire. D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries ; Prelude 15/16 Grid. or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Acoustical sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension- system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to axis of space. c. Install panels in a basket-weave pattern. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension- system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 BLANK PAGE 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 0. |PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.101.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. K.B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points. P.C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified, full width by 36-inch- long in size. 1. Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. R.D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.111.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Commented [RL1]: Commented [RL2R1]: 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.121.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.131.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to 1]0 percent of amount installed. 1.141.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE B.A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. D.B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.151.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C.B. Wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 16.5 mcg/cu. m or 13.5 ppb, whichever is less. E.C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to NFPA 265. 2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: C. Description: Provide mildew-resistant products in rolls from same production run and complying with the following: 1. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type I, Light Type II, Medium Type III, Heavy-Duty products. 2. ASTM F 793 for peelable strippable wall coverings. a. Category: I, Decorative Only II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability III, Decorative with High Serviceability IV, Type I, Commercial Serviceability V, Type II, Commercial Serviceability VI, Type III, Commercial Serviceability. I.D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on the drawings. 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.82.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, non-staining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate. E.C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 5. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 WALL LINER INSTALLATION A. Install wall liner, without gaps or overlaps. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.4 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. 1. For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every other strip. D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. E. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted. G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips. H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 3.63.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 01 October 2021 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 097516 - STONE BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stone base. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079213 "Elastomeric Joint Sealants" for sealing expansion joints in stone base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone base, including dimensions and profiles of stone units. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include four or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work. 2. For each color of grout, pointing mortar and sealant required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Material Test Reports: 1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous five years. 2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone base. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone base similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockup for stone base, not less than 36 inches (900 mm) long. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Sealant Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 079213 "Elastomeric Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) during installation and for seven days after completion. 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone base by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and installation of stone base to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to stone base. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single source, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each. 2.2 MARBLE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503. B. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, Crema Marfil stone. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements: 1. See Finish Schedule on drawings for approved manufacturer and stone selection. D. E. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur. Finish: Polished 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Molding Plaster: ASTM C 59/C 59M. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. E. Water: Potable. F. Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 G. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonstone Materials Corporation. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. j. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. 2.4 GROUT A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. C-Cure. c. Custom Building Products. d. DAP Inc. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, packaged with other dry ingredients. 3. Grout Type: Sanded. C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, packaged, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Jamo Inc. 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. 2.5 POINTING MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Pigments shall have a record of satisfactory performance in mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, except with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Water: Potable. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone they are applied to. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match other joints in stone adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS A. Wire Tiebacks: No. 9 AWG copper or copper-alloy or 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) diameter, stainless- steel wire. 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.8 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness. B. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care; ACI International. e. Miracle Sealants Company. f. Stone Care International. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.9 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Fabricate stone base in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII." C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association. 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary. 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. D. Fabricate molded work to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. 1. Produce moldings with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of molding shape; do not sculpt moldings. E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. F. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples and mockups. 2.10 STONE BASE A. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (20 mm) unless otherwise indicated. B. Top-Edge Detail: As indicated. C. Ends: Butt ends into casings unless otherwise indicated. D. Joints: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide grouted joints. 1. Locate joints at midpoints between adjacent paneling joints unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum segment length shall not be less than twelve (12) inches unless entire length of wall segment is less than twelve (12) inches. 2.11 MIXES A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water. B. Mortar, General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. 1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set. C. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Type: N. 2. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and lime. D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for mortar types indicated. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Architect's sample and complying with the following: 1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight. 2. Type: N. 3. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and lime. E. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive stone base and conditions under which stone base will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone base. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone base. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING STONE, GENERAL A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. B. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. D. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. E. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing of expansion and other joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum. B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STONE BASE A. Stone Base: Adhere units to gypsum board with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting. B. Assemble indicated multiple-piece stone base by bonding joints with stone adhesive as units are set. Mask areas adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units in place to ensure that surfaces are properly aligned and joints are minimum width. C. Point joints after setting stone. D. Fill joints with sealant after setting and grouting and pointing stone. 3.5 GROUTING JOINTS A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A108.10. 1. Use sanded grout mixture for joints wider than or equal to 1/8 inch (3 mm). B. Remove temporary shims before grouting. C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool. 3.6 POINTING JOINTS WITH MORTAR A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing temporary shims, dust, and mortar particles. Where setting spots occur at joints, rake out excess setting mortar or plaster to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Apply mortar first to areas where depths are greater than surrounding areas until a uniform depth is formed. C. Tool joints when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a round jointer having a diameter 1/8 inch (3 mm) larger than width of joint. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealants. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone base as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and 01 October 2021 STONE BASE 097516 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone base of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone base. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Stone base and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Stone base not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone base that matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone base no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage. B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 097519 - STONE TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior stone trim at Baptistry. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing expansion joints in interior stone trim. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone trim, including dimensions and profiles of stone units. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include four or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work. 2. For each color of grout, pointing mortar and sealant required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Material Test Reports: 1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous five years. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing interior stone trim similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for typical interior stone trim as shown on Drawings. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Sealant Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical units so that they are right side up when units are installed. C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) during installation and for seven days after completion. B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive interior stone trim by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Template the existing stone font cap prior to demolition. New cap is to accommodate existing glass railing in the same configuration. Coordinate overall width of new font cap with drawings. See C2/AE301 1.9 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and installation of interior stone trim to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to interior stone trim. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each. B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding." 2.2 MARBLE A. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, white stone with only slight veining. B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available stone varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. See Finish Schedule on drawings for approved manufacturer and stone selection. C. Cut: Vein or Fleuri as selected by Architect. D. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur. E. Finish: Match Architect's sample. F. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Molding Plaster: ASTM C 59/C 59M. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. E. Water: Potable. F. Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. G. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonstone Materials Corporation. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. j. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. H. Stone Adhesive: Two-part, epoxy-resin or polyester-resin stone adhesive with ainitial set time of not more than two hours at 70 deg F (21 deg C). 1. Color: Match stone. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Epoxy Adhesive: 1) Akemi North America; Akepox. 2) Axson North America, Inc; Akabond Epoxy. 3) Bonstone Materials Corporation; Touchstone Last Patch. b. Polyester Adhesive: 1) Akemi North America; Akepox. 2) Axson North America, Inc; Akabond Epoxy. 3) Bonstone Materials Corporation; Gripstone L-200KG. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 2.4 GROUT A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. C-Cure. c. Custom Building Products. d. DAP Inc. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. 2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, packaged with other dry ingredients. 3. Grout Type: Sanded. C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, packaged, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. i. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. 2.5 POINTING MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Pigments shall have a record of satisfactory performance in mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, except with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. E. Water: Potable. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone they are applied to. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match other joints in stone adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1). B. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Wire Tiebacks: 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) diameter stainless-steel wire. 2.8 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness. B. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care; ACI International. e. Miracle Sealants Company. f. Stone Care International. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.9 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Fabricate stone trim in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII." C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association. 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary. 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. D. Fabricate molded work to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. 1. Produce moldings with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of molding shape; do not sculpt moldings. 2. Miter moldings at corners, unless otherwise indicated, with edges of miters slightly eased at outside corners. E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. F. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples and mockups. 2.10 STONE TRIM 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. Flat Trim: 1. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (20 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edge Detail: As indicated. 3. Joints: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide grouted joints. B. Font Cap: 1. Profile: a. Template the existing stone font cap prior to demolition. New cap is to accommodate existing glass railing in the same configuration. Coordinate overall width of new font cap with drawings. b. Match profile indicated on Drawings – See AE301. 2. Joints: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide grouted joints. 2.11 MIXES A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water. B. Mortar, General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. 1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set. C. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Type: N. 2. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and lime. D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for mortar types indicated. Provide pointing mortar mixed to match Architect's sample and complying with the following: 1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight. 2. Type: N. 3. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and lime. E. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's written instructions. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive stone trim and conditions under which stone trim will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone trim. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone trim. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING STONE, GENERAL A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. B. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. E. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing of expansion and other joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 partitions, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Stone Trim: At locations with stone paneling, set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches (450 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. Provide no fewer than two anchors per piece for stone trim up to 48 inches (1200 mm) in length, plus one additional anchor for each additional 24 inches (600 mm) of length. B. Stone Trim: At locations without stone paneling, adhere units to gypsum board with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting. C. Assemble indicated multiple-piece stone trim by bonding joints with stone adhesive as units are set. Mask areas adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units in place to ensure that surfaces are properly aligned and joints are minimum width. D. Point joints after setting stone. E. Fill joints with sealant after setting and pointing stone. 3.5 POINTING JOINTS WITH MORTAR A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing temporary shims, dust, and mortar particles. Where setting spots occur at joints, rake out excess setting mortar or plaster to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Apply mortar first to areas where depths are greater than surrounding areas until a uniform depth is formed. C. Tool joints when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a round jointer having a diameter 1/8 inch (3 mm) larger than width of joint. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealants. 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean interior stone trim as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace interior stone trim of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone trim. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone trim and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone trim not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in interior stone trim that matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. D. Clean interior stone trim no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage. B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 STONE TRIM 097519 – 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 BLANK PAGE 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.6 Paint: 5 percent, but not less than [1 gal.] QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.] [ but not less than the following:] 1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Finished wood surfaces, including cabinetry, paneling and trim shall be free of runs, streaks, sags, lint, fish eyes, overspray, and orange peel. F. Opaque Finish: 1. Provide: Benjamin Moore – Scuff X 2. Sheen: Satin 3. Finish shall include two topcoats 4. After installation of opaque standing and running trim is completed, fill gaps, re‐prime, sand, and apply two topcoats of specified material in finished color. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. END OF SECTION 099123 01 October 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 [This page left intentionally blank] 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Exposed dimension lumber. b. Dressed lumber. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors. 2. Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for transparent high-performance coatings on concrete floors and clay masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 indicated. 1. bmit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches (200 mm) square or 8 inches (200 mm) long. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: See finish schedule. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: Match existing trim. 2.3 STAINS A. Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Semi-Transparent: MPI #13. B. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90. 2.4 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57. B. Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6 or 7): MPI #78. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 9 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. D. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE 1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, gloss (Gloss Level 4), MPI #57. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 BLANK PAGE 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 SECTION 099600 - RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resistant coatings for concrete substrates used for the containment of potable water. Resistant coating rapidly cures to form a seamless, abrasion resistant, and waterproof lining. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI 201.1R – Guide for Making a Condition Survey of Concrete in Service. B. ASTM C836 – High-Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. C. ASTM C957 – High Solids Content, Cold-Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Integral Wearing Surface. D. ASTM D36 – Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball Apparatus). E. ASTM D412 – Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension. F. ASTM D624 – Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. G. ASTM D648 – Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. H. ASTM D751 – Coated Fabrics. I. ASTM D822 – Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. J. ASTM D1117 – Evaluation Nonwoven Fabric. K. ASTM D1682 – Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabric. L. ASTM D2240 – Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. M. ASTM D3786 – Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method. N. ASTM D4060 – Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. O. ASTM D4258 – Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. P. ASTM D4259-88 – Abrading Concrete. 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 Q. ASTM D4263 – Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. R. ASTM D4285 – Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air. S. ASTM E96 – Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. T. ICRI 03732 – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymers Overlays. U. SSPC-SP10/NACE No. 2 – Near-White Blast Cleaning. V. SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures (Submittal Procedures). B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including surface preparation, application, and curing. C. Samples: Submit 3-inch by 1-inch samples for approval by the Engineer. 1. Cured chemical resistant coating, 60 mils thick. 2. Reinforcing fabric and joint cover sheet. D. Applicator’s Project References: Submit list of completed project references. E. Certification of Applicator’s Supervisor: Submit for applicator’s supervisor a certificate indicating completion of manufacture’s contractor training program. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Applicator: Use applicator experienced in the application of the specified resistant coating for a minimum of 2-years on projects of similar size and complexity. Provide a list of completed projects including project name and location, name of engineer, name of coating manufacturer, and approximate quantity of coating applied. Architect and Owner reserve the right to review and approve the applicator prior to bid award. 2. Applicator’s Supervisor: Employ a supervisor during all phases of the work that had successfully completed manufacturer’s contractor training program. 3. Applicator’s Personnel: Employ persons trained for the application of chemical resistant coating. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with environmental regulations. C. Pre-Application Meeting: 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 1. Convene a pre-application meeting 6-8 weeks before the start of application of the resistant coating. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the contractor, sub-contractor, engineer, applicator, and manufacturer’s representative. 3. Review environmental requirements, materials, protection of adjacent work, surface preparation, application, curing, field quality control, cleaning, and coordination with other work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLNG A. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. 2. Do not deliver material to site more than one month before use. B. Storage: 1. Store the material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Store materials indoor in an area well ventilated and protected from damage. 3. Do not store material near open flame, sparks, or hot surfaces. 4. Store materials on raised platforms and covered by waterproofing covers. 5. Keep material containers closed. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply in wet weather or when rain is imminent. B. Apply when the surface is a minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and a minimum of 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above dew point. Consult manufacturer for application instructions if the ambient or surface temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees F). C. Do not apply to porous substrates when substrate or ambient temperatures are rising. D. Do not apply to porous substrates when substrate is in direct sunlight. E. Do not apply over substrates that are frozen or contain frost. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide a 5-year material and 1-year labor warranty. Obtain material warranty from manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. C.I.M. Industries Inc., 23 Elm Street, Peterborough NH 03458. Phone (603) 924-9481. Toll Free (800) 543-3458. Fax (603) 924-9482. 2.2 RESISTANT COATINGS A. Resistant coating: CIM 1061. Two-component, high solids, elastomeric asphalt modified urethane. Designed for spray, squeegee, or roller application. 1. Potable Water Service: Classified for potable water contact in tanks, reservoirs, pipes, and joints in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 up to 180 degrees F (82 degrees C). 2. Elastomeric Waterproofing, ASTM C836 and C957: Exceeds all criteria. 3. Solids by volume: 88 percent. 4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 0.75 pounds per gallon (90 g/L). 5. Mullen Burst Strength, ASTM D751, 50 mils in CIM Scrim: 150 pounds per square inch. 6. Tear Strength, ASTM D624, Die C: 180 pounds per inch. 7. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412, 100-mil sheet: 1000 pounds per square inch. 8. Extension to Break, ASTM D412: 350 percent. 9. Recovery from 100 Percent Extension: a. After 5-minutes: 98 percent. b. After 24-hours: 100 percent. 10. Coating Performance, Crack Bridging: a. 10 Cycles at minus 15 degrees F (minus 26 degrees C): Greater than 1/8-inch. b. After Heat Aging: Greater then 1/4-inch. 11. Coating Performance, Weathering, ASTM D822: 5000 hours: no cracking. 12. Softening Point, ASTM D36: Greater than 325 degrees F (160 degrees C). 13. Deflection Temperature, ASTM D648: below minus 60 degrees (minus 50 degrees C). 14. Service Temperature: minus 60 degrees F to 220 degrees F (minus 50 degrees C to 105 degrees C). 15. Hardness, ASTM D2240, Shore A, 77 degrees F (25 degrees C): 65. 16. Permeability to Water Vapor, ASTM E96, Method E, 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), 100-mil sheet: 0.03 perms. 17. Abrasion Resistance, Weight Loss, ASTM D4060: 1.2 mg. 18. Adhesion to Concrete, Dry, Elcometer: 350 pounds per square inch. 19. Color: Black. B. Primer: CIM 61 BG Epoxy Primer. Two-component, high solids, epoxy primer. [Use as a primer coat on dry, porous substrates such as concrete.] [Prevents flash rust on blasted steel.] 1. Solids by Volume: 80 percent mixed. 2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 1.41 pounds per gallon (170 g/L). C. Bonding Agent: CIM Bonding Agent. Organosilane compound dispersed in isopropyl alcohol. Ensures a continuous and uniform bond between surfaces. Use the bonding agent over non- porous surfaces such as steel, except where primer has been installed. Do not use where solvent cleaners are prohibited. 1. Solids by Volume: Less then 1 percent. 2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 6.4 pounds per gallon (743 g/L). 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 D. Patching Material: CIM 1000 Trowel Grade. Liquid applied, chemical and corrosion resistant urethane elastomer, chemically thickened to allow trowel application with minimum sag. Use as a crack filler and for application to vertical surfaces and cold joints. 1. Elastomeric Waterproofing, ASTM C836 and C957: Exceeds all criteria. 2. Solids by volume: 89 percent. 3. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 0.74 pounds per gallon (88 g/L). 4. Mullen Burst Strength, ASTM D751, 50 mils in CIM Scrim: 150 pounds per square inch. 5. Tear Strength, ASTM624, Die C: 150 pounds per inch. 6. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412, 100-mil sheet: 800 pounds per square inch. 7. Extension to Break, ASTM D412: 300 percent. 8. Recovery from 100 Percent Extention: a. After 5-minutes: 98 percent. b. After 24-hours: 100 percent. 9. Coating Performance, Crack Bridging: a. 10 Cycles at minus 15 degrees F (minus 26 degrees C): Greater than 1/8-inch. b. After Heat Aging: Greater then 1/4-inch. 10. Coating Performance, Weathering, ASTM D 822: 5000 hours: no cracking. 11. Softening Point, ASTM D36: Greater than 325 degrees F (160 degrees C). 12. Deflection Temperature, ASTM D648: below minus 60 degrees (minus 50 degrees C). 13. Service Temperature: minus 60 degrees F to 220 degrees F (minus 50 degrees C to 105 degrees C). 14. Hardness, ASTM D2240, Shore A, 77 degrees F (25 degrees C): 60. 15. Permeability to Water Vapor, ASTM E96, Method E, 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), 100-mil sheet: 0.03 perms. 16. Abrasion Resistance, Weight Loss, ASTM D4060: 1.2 mg. 17. Adhesion to Concrete, Dry, Elcometer: 350 pounds per square inch. 18. Color: Black. E. Reinforcing Fabric and Joint Cover Sheet: CIM Scrim. Stitch bonded polyester. Compatible with coating materials. 1. Weight: 3 ounces per square yard (100 g/m²). 2. Tensile Strength, ASTM D1682: 57.1 pounds (30 kg). 3. Elongation, ASTM D1682: 61.65 percent. 4. Mullen Burst Strength, ASTM D3726: 176.8 pounds per square inch (1,215 kPa). 5. Trapezoid Tear Strength, ASTM D1117: 16.1 pounds (7.2 kg). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECT A. Inspect substrate and adjacent areas where chemical resistant coating will be applied. Notify the Architect of conditions that would adversely affect the application or subsequent utilization of the chemical resistant coating. Do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PROTECTION 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 A. Protect adjacent work and surrounding areas from contact with chemical resistant coating. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE A. Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Provide clean, dry, and structurally sound concrete surface. C. Existing Concrete: Remove existing coating. Patch existing coating as approved by the Engineer. Abrade the existing coating and apply sample patch to test for suitability and adhesion. D. Condition Survey: Perform a condition survey of existing concrete in accordance with ACI 201.1R. E. Abrasive Blasting: 1. Prepare concrete surface to receive chemical resistant coating by abrasive blasting. 2. Remove dirt, soil, grease, oil, paint, coatings, form release agents, curing compounds, laitance, loose material, unsound concrete, and other foreign materials that would inhibit performance of chemical resistant coating in accordance with ASTM D4258 and by abrasive blasting. 3. Obtain a firm, sound concrete surface in which bug holes are fully opened or repaired. 4. Remove sharp concrete edges and projections. 5. Perform abrasive blasting in accordance with ASTM D4259-88. 6. Receive approval by Engineer of blasting media. 7. Maintain air supply for abrasive blasting free of oil and water in accordance with ASTM D4285. 8. Expose aggregate to obtain a profile of ICRI CSP 4 to 6 in accordance with ICRI 03732. F. Repair concrete surface to be free of holes. Fully open bug holes before repair. Repair defects in the concrete surface, such as bug holes, air pockets, and honeycomb by filling and smoothing off with patching material, epoxy patching compound, or grout. Abrasive blast repaired surfaces. G. Ensure substrate is clean and dry in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove surface laitance from concrete surface to expose aggregate to obtain a profile of ICRI CSP 4 to 6 in accordance with ICRI 03732. H. Repair cracks in concrete surface with material suitable for type and width of crack, compatible with substrate and chemical resistant coating, and approved by the Engineer. I. Moisture Tests: Do not apply primer or chemical resistant coating to concrete surface unless two or more of the flowing moisture tests confirm appropriate moisture levels for properly prepared substrates: 1. Plastic Sheet Method (ASTM D4263): Pass/Fail. 2. Relative Humidity Test: Less than 75 percent relative humidity at 70 degrees F. 3. Calcium Chloride Test: Less than 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours. 4. Radio Frequency Test: Less than 5 percent moisture. 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3.6 APPLICATION A. Apply primer to concrete surface a minimum of 5-mils wet thickness. A Uniform coating free of holidays or pinholes is necessary to minimize outgassing effects curing the application of the chemical resistant coating to porous surfaces such as concrete. Surfaces may require additional coats to obtain a pinhole free finish. B. Allow primer to cure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions before top coating with the chemical resistant coating. C. Apply chemical resistant coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Keep material containers tightly closed until ready for use. E. Keep equipment, air supplies, and application surfaces dry. F. Mix and apply when chemical resistant coating is above 60 degrees F (15 degrees C). G. Do not use adulterants, thinners, or cutback solutions. H. Blend and mix 2-component materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not hand mix components. I. Maintain air supply for material spray application free of oil and water in accordance with ASTM D4285. J. Apply chemical resistant coating directly to a clean and dry surface or to reinforcing fabric. K. Apply a 6 to 12-inch wide strip of joint cover sheet over cracks over 1/8-inch wide, non-working joints, and edges. Adhere center joint cover sheet over all joints by applying a tack coat of the chemical resistant coating. L. Apply sufficient chemical resistant coating to achieve 60-mils wet film thickness for containment of chemicals. M. Joint Lines: 1. Prepare for joint lines should rain or other conditions require work stoppage or extended delay. 2. Install joint lines clean and straight. Install overlap 6-inches minimum to ensure an impervious joint. 3. Severely abrade with wire brush or sandpaper and apply bonding agent to all areas where the chemical resistant coating has cured beyond its recoat window. N. Recoating: 1. Recoat the chemical resistant coating system within the recoat window to obtain maximum interlayer adhesion to build specific thickness. 2. Immersion Service: Minimize areas to be recoated outside the recoat window, except at joint lines. 01 October 2021 RESISTANT COATINGS 099600 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel - 220038 3. Non-Immersion Service: Severely abrade with wire brush or surface grinder, apply bonding agent, and recoat, if chemical resistant coating has cured more than the recoat window. Acceptable adhesion can only be achieved though aggressive abrading. 4. Broadcast silica sand over the entire surface immediately following the application of the second coat. 3.7 CURING A. Cure chemical resistant coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Curing Time: 1. Allow sufficient time for solvents to evaporate from the cured chemical resistant coating before placing into service. 2. Allow minimum solvent release time of 24-hours to 48-hours at 60 degrees F (15 degrees C) for a 60-wet mil coating thickness. C. Receive approval of cured coating by Engineer. 3.8 FIELD QUALTIY CONTROL A. Provide inspection services by an independent inspection firm throughout all phases of surface preparation, application, and curing of the chemical resistant coating. 3.9 CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of all temporary materials used to protect adjacent work and surrounding areas. B. Immediately remove and clean chemical resistant coating materials from surfaces not intended to receive the materials. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Plumbing work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Supports and anchorages. 1.02 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Equipment, pipe hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 22 0548 " Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.0 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.5 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, and crawlspaces. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms, accessible pipe shafts, accessible plumbing chases and accessible tunnels. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." C. The Mechanical Contractor shall work under the Contractor to assemble all trade coordination drawings (info.) and compile them into a single BIM model. The purpose of this model shall be 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel to coordinate all applicable trade components and resolve conflicts prior to procurement / fabrication / installation. Refer to specifications for further requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: , ASME B1.20.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Hart Industries, International, Inc. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full- face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: (Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.) a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.06 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.07 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.09 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.10 LINK SEAL A. Link-Seal® Modular Seal Pressure Plates 1. Link-Seal® modular seal pressure plates shall be molded of glass reinforced Nylon Polymer with the following properties: a. Izod Impact - Notched = 2.05ft-lb/in. per ASTM D-256 b. Flexural Strength @ Yield = 30,750 psi per ASTM D-790 c. Flexural Modulus = 1,124,000 psi per ASTM D-790 d. Elongation Break = 11.07% per ASTM D-638 e. Specific Gravity = 1.38 per ASTM D-792 2. Models LS200-275-300-315 shall incorporate the most current Link-Seal® Modular Seal design modifications and shall include an integrally molded compression assist boss on the top (bolt entry side) of the pressure plate, which permits increased compressive loading of the rubber sealing element. Models 315-325-340-360-400-410-425-475-500- 525-575-600 shall incorporate an integral recess known as a “Hex Nut Interlock” designed to accommodate commercially available fasteners to insure proper thread engagement for the class and service of metal hardware. All pressure plates shall have a permanent identification of the manufacturer’s name molded into it. 3. For fire and Hi-Temp service, pressure plates shall be steel with 2-part Zinc Dichromate Coating. 4. Link-Seal® Modular Seal Hardware: All fasteners shall be sized according to latest Link- Seal® modular seal technical data. Bolts, flange hex nuts shall be: 316 Stainless Steel per ASTM F593-95, with a 85,000 psi average tensile strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped- steel type. f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast- brass type with chrome-plated finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped- steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type. M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. O. Above ground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 01 October 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.04 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.07 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout around anchors. G. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 0523 DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Valve work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Bronze ball valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. B. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 01 October 2021 DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 01 October 2021 DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 01 October 2021 DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve- end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3.05 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: One, Two or Three piece, full, bronze with bronze or stainless-steel trim. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Hanger and Support work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Pipe positioning systems. 8. Equipment supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. B. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire- suppression piping. C. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. D. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Seismic Performance: Plumbing equipment, hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 22 0548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.0 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.5 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems. 4. Pipe positioning systems. 5. Mechanical Anchors: ICC-ES Evaluation Reports validating ‘Cracked Concrete’ testing per A.C. 193 must be provided for anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life- safety systems including fire sprinkler systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. 2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 4. Seismic calculations and detailed analysis: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. Project specific design documentation and calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a registered professional engineer who is responsible for the seismic restraint design and who is licensed in the state where the project is being constructed (ASCE 7, 13.2.1.1). 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel.", AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil International. 2. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 3. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 4. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 5. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 6. Empire Industries, Inc. 7. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 8. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 9. Grinnell Corp. 10. GS Metals Corp. 11. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 12. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 13. PHS Industries, Inc. 14. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 15. Tolco Inc. 16. Simpson Strong-Tie Co. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.03 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.04 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil International. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 4. GS Metals Corp. 5. Hilti, Inc. 6. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Tolco Inc. 9. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.05 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.06 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. MKT Fastening, LLC. c. Powers Fasteners. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors and Concrete Screws: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. For anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life- safety systems including fire sprinkler systems, Anchors shall have been tested for ‘Cracked Concrete’ per A.C. 193 per a valid ICC-ES Evaluation Report. Manufacturers with these anchors have been designated below with: ‘*’ 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. g. Simpson Strong-Tie Co. * 2.07 PIPE STAND FABRICATION A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion- resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. c. MIRO Industries. d. Unipure C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Manufacturers: a. MIRO Industries. D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Manufacturers: 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. Anvil International. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. c. MIRO Industries. d. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous- thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless- steel, roller-type pipe support. E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International. b. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Bases: One or more plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural- steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.08 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Manufacturers: 1. C & S Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc. 2.09 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off- center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18 or Simpson Blue Banger Concrete insert with UL & FM approvals): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1- 1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. C. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. F. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used for seismic bracing attachments. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. For anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life-safety systems including fire sprinkler systems, anchors shall have been tested for ‘Cracked Concrete’ per A.C. 193 and shall have a valid ICC-ES Evaluation Report G. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs. H. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures. I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. J. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. P. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. For applications where seismic bracing is required, ‘Cracked Concrete’ expansion anchors or concrete screws tested per A.C. 193 must be provided for seismic bracing anchorage where post-installed anchors are required. 3.04 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches . 3.06 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. A. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Plumbing Pipe Identification work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Pipe labels. 2. Valve tags. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.02 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.02 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09. B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. 2. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. 3. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. 3.03 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Comply with ASME A13.1. 3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Comply with ASME A13.1. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Plumbing Pipe Insulation work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Insulating the following plumbing piping services: a. Domestic cold-water piping. 1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. Refer to Section 22 0500 “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 22 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Insulation for below-ambient service requires a vapor-barrier. C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. F. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel G. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS. H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553: 1. Type II and ASTM C 1290, Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, a. Without factory-applied jacket with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. J. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.02 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik. B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik and Quik-Cote 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.04 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. b. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-30. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 501. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 570. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-10. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.05 SEALANTS A. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.06 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. 2.07 SECUREMENTS A. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at: a. 2 inches o.c. b. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.04 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.05 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing- 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.08 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.09 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulation shall have a k value that meets the minimum requirements of the latest International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following; a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1) 1 inch thick b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1) 1 inch thick END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Domestic Water Pipe work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. 1.02 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Pipe hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 23 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 1. For piping with a seismic importance factor of 1.0 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. For piping with a seismic importance factor of 1.5 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. 2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. B. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." C. All piping shall be American made and tested; no import pipe will be permitted. D. All exposed water supply piping in toilet rooms, custodial rooms and kitchens shall be chromium plated. E. All piping installed in or passing through a plenum must be plenum rated, fire wrapped, or installed in a metal conduit. 2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. F. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.03 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Nipples and Waterways: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. c. Matco-Norca. d. Clearflow/Perfection Corp. e. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66 or ASTM F-1545-97. 3. Electroplated steel nipple or waterway complying with ASTM F 1545 or ANSI/NSF-61 Compliant. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene or LTHS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." G. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. K. Install piping to permit valve servicing. L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. P. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps." R. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. 3.05 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples/waterways. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples/waterways. D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric nipples/waterways. 3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements for connection sizes in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water- sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 01 October 2021 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Some piping types and sizes mentioned in this section may not be used on this project. B. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 3 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball, with flanged ends for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use needle valve specified on detail. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Sanitary Waste Pipe work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 1. For piping with a seismic importance factor of 1.0 the term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. For piping with a seismic importance factor of 1.5 the term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Field quality-control reports. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.02 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: All cast-iron waste, vent and sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM A888. All products shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Soil Pipe Institute and shall be listed by NSF International or receive prior approval of the engineer. All cast-iron pipe and fittings shall be American made and tested. Non-compliant import cast-iron products will not be permitted. Any non-compliant cast-iron product installed by the contractor on this project will be replaced at the contractor’s expense and shall include all repairs, patching, painting and other incidental work required to return the project to its pre-remediation state. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AB&I Foundry b. Charoltte Pipe c. Tyler Pipe B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO. b. Ideal c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Listing: Couplings shall be listed by NSF International. Each coupling shall be embossed with the NSF seal. C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Husky SD 4000. b. Clamp-All Corp HI-TORQ 125. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Install piping to allow application of insulation. I. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5. N. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. O. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping. P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. 3.04 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling or valve and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inchod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. E. Make fixture and equipment connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.09 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 3 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and larger shall be the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 3 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and larger shall be the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 1319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Sanitary Waste Pipe work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. Cleanouts. 2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 1.02 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Plumbing equipment, hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 22 0548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round, stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Air-Gap Fittings: 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. 01 October 2021 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. D. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. F. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services required to fully complete all Plumbing Fixture work as is indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including, but not limited to, the following described items. 1. The following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: a. Initiatory sinks. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating. B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated. C. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. C. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. 1. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1. Initiatory Sink (IS-1) – Sink shall be furnished and installed by the contractor. a. Custom stone sink and cabinet. Reference architectural elevations for sink and cabinet requirements. b. Faucet: Polished chrome-plated, brass rigid or swing 5-1/4” centerline deck-mounted gooseneck spout with aerator, single lever handle with ceramic disk cartridge valve, polished chrome finish, compliant with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. Tomlinson 600 CBR c. P-Trap: Provide 1-1/2” p-trap with air gap connection. See detail on plans. d. Drain: Pop-up stopper drain, chrome plated finish, brass construction. Kohler Model K-7124 e. Stop Valves: Two ½” ball valves (per valve specification 230523). The upper ball valve is to be used to balance the flow with the handle being removed after balancing. The lower ball valve is to be used as an isolation valve. f. 1/2 inch water supply and 1-1/2 inch copper waste. g. Reference detail on drawings for additional requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." D. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. E. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. F. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. G. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. H. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. I. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." J. All plumbing fixtures are to be mounted at the height specified on the Architectural drawings. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. 01 October 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 1 SECTION 230000 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to work of this section. B. Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to work of this section. See various Sections on electrical work, general requirements C. Related Sections: Refer to electrical requirements for mechanical equipment in Sections of Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Basic requirements common to the work in general of Division 23 and other Divisions and Sections of the Specification where referenced. B. Provide all labor unless specified otherwise, any materials and equipment necessary for completely finished and operational mechanical systems described and specified under Sections of Division 23. C. Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, transitions, and other fittings and accessories required as part of the work even though not specified or indicated. D. Inspection: Inspect work preceding or interfacing with work of Division 23 and report any known or observed defects that affect the work of construction to the Manager/General Contractor. Do not proceed with the work until defects are documented and corrected. E. Existing Utilities: Are indicated as accurately as possible on the Drawings. Close openings and repair damage in acceptable manner to utilities encountered. This Contractor shall be responsible for field surveying all aspects of existing conditions prior to bid date and commencement of any work. Change orders will not be issued for a failure to review existing conditions which affect Division 23 work. 1.3 REFERENCES & CODES A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the various codes, ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project location in effect on the date of invitations for bids. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications shall supersede and govern. B. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and Architect/Engineer free and harmless The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 2 from liability of any nature or kind of arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances. C. Permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract shall be secured by the contractor(s). Any associated fees including connection fees related to utility hookups will be paid for directly by the Owner. D. Applicable Codes: 1. International Building Code - 2018 Edition 2. International Mechanical Code - 2018 Edition 3. International Plumbing Code - 2018 Edition 4. International Fire Code - 2018 Edition 5. International Energy Code - 2018 Edition 6. International Fuel Gas Code - 2018 Edition 7. National Electrical Code - 2017 Edition E. Reference Standards 1. American Welding Society 2. SMACNA Duct Design Standards 3. Local/State Plumbing Code 4. Locally enforced NFPA Codes 5. Local Fuel Utility Regulations 6. Local Power Utility Regulations 7. American Gas Association 8. ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping 9. ANSI B31.1 Piping 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. General Definitions 1. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “furnish” is used to mean supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. 2. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “install” is used to describe operations at Project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. 3. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. 4. Indicated: The term “indicated” is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or schedules on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 3 limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. 5. General Contractor: The term “General Contractor” used in Division 23 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents means the party with whom the Owner has executed the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6. Approved Equal: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “approved equal” means that any materials, equipment, work procedures and techniques shall be either addressed on the drawing, specifications or addendum by manufacturer or by detailed material description. When brand names are referenced, it implies that only the manufacturers listed are approved. All approved material, equipment, work procedures, and techniques will be noted in the specifications, drawings, or by addendum prior to bid date. Items not approved in this manner will not be considered. B. Plans and Specifications 1. The mechanical drawings show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The architectural and structural drawings shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over mechanical drawings. Request clarification in the event of conflict. 2. Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such extensions, fittings, valves and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. 3. Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to make such examination. 4. During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed nor allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed nor allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Samples, Shop Drawings and Product Data as required by various Sections of Division 23 in accordance with The General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor agrees that these Submittals proceed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of these Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that the Contractors are then demonstrating understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between these The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 4 Submittals and the Contract Documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after these Submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be followed. B. The Submittals shall be submitted in a single package with all mechanical equipment for the project enclosed. The Submittals shall be enclosed in a stiff back, 3-ring binder. All mechanical equipment shall be separated with tabbed index cards with an indexed legend provided in the front of the binder. In the event Submittals are submitted electronic format, the Submittal shall be in the form of a single PDF file in which all equipment has been electronically bookmarked and all bookmarks have been identified using the equipment tags used on the drawings. Individual PDF files for separate pieces of equipment or specification sections will not be accepted. C. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 23 showing compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Signed copies shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. D. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit printed operating instructions and maintenance data in accordance with Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in this section. E. Submittals will be reviewed and marked as follows: 1. No Exceptions Taken: No action required. 2. Make Corrections Noted: Correct the Submittals per notes by engineer and submit new copies of Submittal to contractor for project records. Do not resubmit to engineer. 3. Rejected: Equipment as submitted does not meet requirements of contract documents. Revise and/or clarify per comments and resubmit to engineer. 4. Submittal Not Requested: Submittal not required per specification. Submittal returned with no review. F. Note that the Submittal review process does not relieve Contractor from being ultimately responsible for ensuring that submitted items satisfy all requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Site Condition and Coordination 1. Before any ductwork is fabricated or equipment installed and before running and/or fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork, the Contractor shall provide Architect and Engineer 1/4" scale drawings of all mechanical rooms and main access walkways, coordinated with all trades with submitted equipment and verify all other areas to assure himself that they can be run and installed as contemplated in cooperation with Contractors and other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural and Architectural Work and maintain access walkways area clear for maintenance. H. ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 5 1. These documents outline a way in which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow. 2. Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised. 3. The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which could save time and effort. These may be presented to the Engineer with a breakdown of possible cost savings for review. 4. Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After bidding, substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and implemented only with authorization. 1.6 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility 1. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. 2. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. 3. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance. Respect manufacturers recommendations for access and clearance. 4. Access Doors - General: All items of mechanical equipment which may require adjustment, maintenance, replacement or which control a system function shall be made readily accessible to personnel operating the building. 5. Provide access doors in all ductwork or plenums as required to maintain fire dampers equipment, controls or other elements of the system. Doors shall conform to SMACNA standards unless otherwise detailed or specified. 6. General Contractor shall provide access doors in floors, walls, ceiling and partitions to valves, cleanouts, bath tub drains, chases, dampers, etc., and to access doors in ductwork requiring the same. Refer to Architectural Specifications Section 08305 for additional access door requirements. Coordinate with General Contractor for additional access doors required. B. Rough-Ins 1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. C. Cutting and Patching 1. Layout the project ahead of time, providing sleeves and blockouts and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate mechanical installations. Cut and patch only as needed. 2. Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 6 requirements for cutting and patching. 3. Refer to Division 26 Section: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials. 4. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 5. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations. 6. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. 7. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work b. Remove and replace defective Work c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents 8. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing 9. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 10. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architet/Engineer observation of concealed Work. 11. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. 12. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. 13. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 14. Provide core drilling for all concrete or masonry required for mechanical installation, but drill only after obtaining authorization from Owners representative. At issue is a need to avoid excessive cutting of structural reinforcement in existing floor stabs, beams, etc. 15. Contractor shall take precautions so that any dust, fumes, etc. are contained and do not interfere with other contractors ability to perform work. D. Mechanical Installations 1. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 7 6. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of mechanical equipment and materials. 7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 8. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 9. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceiling with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations. 10. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 11. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc., penetration shall be neatly cut and walls shall be filled and patched. E. Permits, Fees and Licenses: 1. Obtain permits, fees and licenses required to do the required work for this project and comply with any requirements necessary. Comply with requirements for inspection, certifications, etc. Owner will pay costs imposed by the city related to such permits. PART 2 - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A Any equipment or materials installed shall be new and manufactured by a firm regularly employed in the manufacture of equipment and/or materials to be used in plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning. Any equipment shown in drawings or schedules shall be the product intended for use in the project. If any substitutions are desired, they shall be cleared by the Engineer. All equipment and materials shall be manufactured in the United States of America. B. All major equipment shown for this project shall come with all necessary accessories/pieces normally supplied with cataloged equipment, along with whatever is needed for a complete and acceptable installation. 2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Any openings in pipe or ducts shall be capped/covered so as to prevent any dirt or trash being stuck therein. Plumbing fixtures shall not be used by construction workmen without written consent of the Owner. Any damage incurred by the construction workforce shall be repaired/replaced at the expense of the Contractor. B. After work is completed, all fixtures, equipment and other materials shall be cleaned and polished and presented to the Owner in factory conditions. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 8 2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN A. Foreman 1. A general mechanical foreman shall be designated by the Contractor to the Owner’s Representative to be available on site for consultation. This individual, when appointed, shall not be replaced without prior approval from the Owner’s Representative. B. All mechanics shall be capable journeyman, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction and supervision of skilled journeymen/supervisors. C. No one unskilled in the work which he is given to do shall be employed, and all work shall be executed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. All men employed upon this work shall be competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner’s Representative deem anyone employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, he shall be dismissed and he shall not be again employed upon the work without permission of the Owner’s Representative. D. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written verification of successful test completion and any applicable certifications shall be submitted to Architect prior to initiating work. 2.4 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING (GENERAL) A. All excavation, trenching and backfilling for underground work shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor as needed. Refer to applicable Division 2 paragraphs for guidelines on excavation and backfilling. Bottom of trench shall be stamped hard, and have a 1/4" per foot of grade to secure uniform fall, unless noted otherwise. Holes/trenches shall be excavated so that pipe rests on solid ground for the length of the pipe. No sewer and water pipe shall share a trench, except where detailed and noted otherwise. Mechanical Contractor shall saw, cut or break and remove existing floor slabs as necessary. B. When backfilling areas where General Contractor has grade work to do, Mechanical Contractor shall backfill and compact to 8" below finish grade. In areas where no grading work is to be done, the Mechanical Contractor shall backfill and match adjacent undisturbed surface, allowing for settling. C. Provide adequate shoring to protect workers from cave-ins for all excavations. D. After excavation and inspection by State/Local Inspector and/or Owner’s Representative, but before backfilling, the excavated area shall be cleaned of debris and trash. The backfilling material shall be cleaned of all trash. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not more 12" thick, and correctly moistened. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 9 E. The Contractor shall take extra precaution to avoid damaging any underground existing utilities or utility tunnels indicated on drawings (or field verified by Owner or Owner’s Representative before excavation begins). Any damage to identified utilities or utility tunnels shall be repaired by the Contractor. 2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Materials and equipment are to be delivered and stored in manufacturer’s unopened containers, fully identifiable by manufacturer’s name, trade name, type, class, grade, size, and color. B. Protection: Materials and equipment are to be stored off the ground, covered, and protected from damage. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials. C. Large Items: Contractor shall arrange with other trades/contractors on the job for installing equipment too large to fit through finished openings/doorways. D. Handling of Materials: Materials and equipment shall be handled, sorted and distributed in a manner so as to protect all materials/equipment from damage. Any materials/equipment that is dented, rusted or corroded or otherwise damaged shall be removed from the job site. Duct with liner that has become wet shall be removed from the job site. The determination of what materials/equipment that is to be removed from the job site is to be made by the Engineer. 2.6 ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS - FLASHINGS A. Sleeves through the floor into dry rooms shall be flush with the floor, caulked and sealed with wound attenuation caulking. B. Sleeves through the walls and ceilings shall be caulked and sealed with sound attenuation caulking. C. Pip sleeves shall allow for movement of the pipe due to expansion and contraction. Seal all openings between rooms and floor to floor airtight with 3M fire stopping material. D. Refer to Section “FIRE STOPPING” for requirements. 2.7 FLASHINGS A. All pipes penetrating the roof shall be flashed. Vent pipes terminating within 24" of the roof shall have a seamless flashing of 6-pound lead clamped to the pipe, and with a flashing shield extended horizontally not less than 12" all around. For single ply membrane roof, follow manufacturer’s directions. B. Roof drains shall clamp to a 6-pound lead flashing extending 18" all around. For single ply membrane roof, follow manufacturer’s directions. C. Other piping penetrating the roof shall be flashed and counter flashed. See drawings or The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 10 Engineer for additional detail. D. All ductwork penetrating the roof shall be made watertight with flashings, counter flashing and sealant. Curbs shall be provided for all such openings. 2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL) A. Provide hangers and/or supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary information is contained in these specifications and on the drawings. B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation. 2.9 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment following the directions, instructions and recommendations from the Manufacturer. If the manufacturer’s instructions are contrary to the drawings, the Contractor shall contact Engineer, who shall make any adjustments to the placement or orientation as he deems necessary. 2.10 LUBRICATION: Lubricate all equipment at startup. Then, provide enough lubrication to ensure the equipment runs as designed until the Owner accepts project. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage to bearings while the equipment is being operated by him. 2.11 FLUSHING AND DRAINING OF SYSTEMS/CLEANING OF PIPE AND DUCTS: Fill, clean and flush and sterilize where appropriate, all water piping systems with water and drain these systems before they are placed in operation. All other piping systems shall be blown out with compressed air or nitrogen in order to remove foreign materials that may have been left or deposited in the piping system during its installation. Duct systems shall have debris removed and fans shall be run to blow out all dust and foreign matter before grilles, outlets or mixing boxes are installed and connected. 2.12 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL A. Motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on electrical drawings and control diagrams shall be furnished and installed under Division 16 of this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned in this section or on the drawings to be supplied by this Contractor shall be installed by him, and mounted, connected and installed according to Division 23 and Division 26 of these specifications. B. Refer to control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions to equipment shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. C. Work of this section is to be coordinated with all work of Division 16 of this Specification. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner for lack of coordination. D. Where the electrical drawings do not show detailed electrical work, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, install and wire (or have pre-wired) all specified and necessary controls for any equipment specified for this project. The purpose of this paragraph is to ensure that the Owners receive a complete operating system at no additional cost for The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX 230000 - 11 field wiring required for related equipment. 2.13 JOBSITE CLEANUP A. Keep site clean during progress of work. B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly. C. Leave equipment in factory furnished condition. Correct any damage and touch up or repaint if necessary. D. Remove all debris from site. E. Convey useful excess material to Owner. 2.14 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Construction Manager/General Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection. B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the Construction Manager/General Contractor. END OF SECTION 230000 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 1 SECTION 230100 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Product maintenance manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All pertinent sections of Division 21, 22, & 23 Mechanical General Requirements, are part of the work of this section. 1. Testing and Balancing is specified in section 230593. 2. Training and Instructions to Owner’s Representative is specified in section 230100. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Coordination of work required for system commissioning. B. Provide (1) hard copy and (1) electronic copy on CD of the O&M manual fully searchable in PDF format. C. Submission of Operating and Maintenance Manuals complete with Balancing Reports (Coordinate with Division 1). PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR O&M MANUALS A. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following: 1. Directory for electronic copy: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. 2. Table of Contents: List each product included in the manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 3. Title Page: Include the following information: a. Subject matter included in the manual. b. Name and address of Project. c. Name and address of Owner. d. Date of submittal e. Name and contact information for Contractor. f. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. g. Name and contact information for Architect. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 2 h. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. i. Name and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. j. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 5. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. a. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. b. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 6. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. a. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11- inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 1. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. b. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. c. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 1. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. d. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 3 enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 7. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: a. Title page. b. Table of contents. c. Manual contents. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. Control diagrams. 2. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 3. Operating logs. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating standards. 6. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 7. Piped system diagrams. 8. Precautions against improper use. 9. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 10. Wiring diagrams. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 2. Engineering data and tests. 3. Equipment function. 4. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 5. Limiting conditions. 6. Manufacturer’s name. 7. Operating characteristics. 8. Performance curves. 9. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable. 1. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 2. Instructions on stopping. 3. Normal shutdown instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 6. Routine and normal operating instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Special operating instructions and procedures. 9. Startup procedures. D. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 4 E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 3. Repair instructions. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Types of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Color, pattern and texture. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Material and chemical composition. 4. Product name and model number. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. E. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturer’s maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. C. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 2. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 3. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 4. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. D. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 5 E. Manufacturer’s Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturer’s maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part of piece of equipment: 1. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 2. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 3. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 4. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. F. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturer’s maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART III - EXECUTION A. Materials and Methods 1. Binders: Binders shall be high quality 8-1/2" x 11" , 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic covers and backbone for slip in title information with 2" to 3-1/2" expandible metal capacity as required for the project. The number of binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 4". a. Place the following information on the front cover and backbone: 1. “Operation and Maintenance Manual”. 2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume). 3. “Rexburg Idaho Temple”. 4. Architect’s name. 5. Engineer’s name. 6. General Contractor’s name. 7. Mechanical Contractor’s name. b. Items 4 through 6 need not be printed on the backbone insert. 2. Contents and Indexing: a. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section additional indexing of component parts may be required. b. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation. c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain the fullest extent all possible information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows. 1. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports. 2. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment. 3. Copy of purchase order change (if any). The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 6 4. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into the following suggested parts: a. Part I - Building and System Descriptions b. Part II - Purchased Equipment Data c. Part III - Test Reports and Valve Charts d. Part IV - Start-Up and Operation e. Part V - Preventative Maintenance Recommendations 5. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained. 6. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan number. 7. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included. 8. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves. 9. Operating and Maintenance Manuals data for Part I shall be obtained directly from the mechanical and electrical consultants. (Allow consultant preparation cost.) 10. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems. 11. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model numbers and plan symbols. 12. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol. 3. Drawings: Binders shall be high quality 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x 11" manilla pockets, which have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manilla pocket. 4. Page Size: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2" x 11" or approximate multiples (preferably 11" x 17") folded to approximately 8-1/2" x 11". B. Manual Preparation 1. Comply with Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 2. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturer’s printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. a. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Manufacturer’s Data: Where manuals contain manufacturer’s standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 7 appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the work and delete references to information not applicable. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 5. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the work. END OF SECTION 230100 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DEMOLITION 230205 - 1 SECTION 230205 - DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Existing mechanical systems are to be removed in remodeled areas of [project], which is no longer needed as a result of work of this project. B. Maintain existing installations which continues in service. C. Any existing material that is to remain is to be adapted to new conditions, i.e., remove and reinstall ductwork and piping which must be offset or revised to accommodate new installation, layouts, etc. D. Only after Owner gives approval can demolition be started. E. A schedule is to be obtained from the owner before any relocating of noted existing equipment. F. Any equipment that is wanted by the Owner is to be removed by him prior to any demolition work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Respond to General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Division 1, etc. B. Respond to General Requirements of Technical Divisions. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. This project is in an existing building, which is to remain occupied in areas unaffected by this remodel. Occupied areas are noted on the drawings. A portion of the existing ductwork, piping, plumbing and fire protection systems will be modified, replaced, altered and removed. The Contractor shall be familiar with existing conditions in and around the building. The building is to be restored to full service. Except for the areas being remodeled, this building is to remain occupied with all systems serving these occupied areas in service. As any temporary disruption in service is to take place, a detailed schedule shall be scheduled as noted below and in other specification sections. All ductwork, piping, plumbing, fire protection, etc. are to be capped and sealed immediately when disruption occurs with approval; service is to be restored to occupied spaces. All building spaces outside of the remodel areas are considered occupied. The drawings will indicate to the Contractor which pieces of equipment and material will be retained by the Owner. The contractor shall protect and deliver such equipment to University personnel. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DEMOLITION 230205 - 2 1.4 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine Owner’s acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Notice shall be given to Owner’s construction coordinator not less than 72 hours prior to the shutdown of any utility services, or necessary building systems. This shutdown will then be scheduled with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown, or re-schedule. Plan for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as needed so as to finish work with minimal disruption. B. The work is be done as outlined on the Mechanical drawings. Install temporary facilities and make them operational prior to the removal or demolition of any mechanical equipment or systems as required by Owner. Protecting from damage, all existing systems that are to remain in operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT A. All ductwork that is rendered obsolete by this work is to be removed, and disposed off site. All ductwork that is to be removed is indicated on the drawings. Any openings that are inactive are to remain covered and protected from damage, contamination, etc. Active openings are to be capped and sealed to insure building system functions are maintained to the remainder of the building. 3.2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. All piping and equipment that is rendered obsolete by this work is to be removed, and disposed off site. All piping and equipment that is to be removed is indicated on the drawings. Identify capped ends to be able to properly restore directional flow. Valve and cap active piping to insure building system function is maintained to remainder of the building. B. Heating water, chilled water, domestic water and fire lines in this building are critical. Do not disrupt without Owner approval. 3.3 CONTROLS A. Remove all controls associated with the removal of the mechanical systems. B. Protect and reuse as noted on the drawings. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DEMOLITION 230205 - 3 C. Upon demolition of any electrical control device, thermostat, etc., the wiring shall be terminated immediately. Terminate and label in nearest j-box leaving the remaining systems in operation. END OF SECTION 230205 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 1 SECTION 230523 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-23 section making reference to valves specified herein. C. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Any work mentioned in this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-23 sections. B. Types of valves described in this section include: 1. Balance Valves 2. Ball Valves 3. Butterfly Valves 4. Check Valves 6. Gate Valves 8. Plug Valves 9. Swing Check 10. Water Pressure Relief Valves 11. Miscellaneous Valves C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms normally engaged in the manufacture of valves of similar type, use and service on similar sized projects, whose products have been in satisfactory use for a minimum of 5 years. B. Provide valves of the same type, and made by the same manufacturer. C. Valves are to have identification with manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked, on the body of the valve. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged-or-welded-end The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 2 valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 “Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves. B. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 “Standard Marking Systems for valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions”. C. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which are UL- listed and FM approved. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and spare parts data are to be submitted for each type of valve. This data is to be included in the maintenance manual, along with: 1. Product Data 2. Shop Drawings This information is to be in accordance with requirements of Division-1. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data, and installation instructions for each type of valve are to be submitted. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 1.6 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion B. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends C. Set angle, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling D. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces E. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open F. Block check valves in either closed or open position PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. General: Valves are to be factory-fabricated, and shall have manufacturer’s recommendations for use in service indicated. Valves are to be of types and pressure ratings indicated; Installer shall determine proper valve selections to comply with installation requirements. End connections are to be able to mate with pipe, tube and equipment connections. Where more than one type of valve is indicated, Installer shall make selection as to which valve is used. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 3 B. Size: Valves are to be the same size as the upstream pipe, unless specifically noted otherwise. C. The following conditions are to be followed: 1. For valves other than quarter turn: a. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem. 2. For valves 4" and smaller: a. Provide lever handl for quarter turn valves, other than plug valves b. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves 3. For valves 6" and larger: a. Provide gear operators for quarter turn valves 4. For overhead valves 8'-0" or higher above the finished floor: a. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains D. Connections: Unless otherwise noted for a particular reason, any valve 2" and larger shall have flanges. For grooved joint steel pipe in 6" and larger sizes, convert to flanged pipe, use indicated ball or butterfly valves. 2.2 CHILLED WATER, GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY WATER, AND HEATING WATER: A. Balance Valves 1. Circuit balancing valves with venture and pressure taps. Do not use gate valves or butterfly valves as balancing valves. Provide schedule showing pressure drop and flow rate of each valve. If improperly sized balance valves are found during the test and balance work, the improperly sized balanced valves are to be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or project. a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Flow Set Accusetter 2. Bell and Gossett 3. Gerund 4. Taco 5. TBA B. Ball Valves 1. Steel piping 2" and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250°F, bronze construction, threaded ends, bubble tight mineral filled PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard, stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4" threaded hose outlet connection. a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 70-100 or 70-200 2. Belimo 3. Hammond UP8313A or UP8303A 4. Mulwaukee BA-100S or BA-150S 5. Nibco PC-585-70 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 4 6. No other manufacturers approved 2. Copper piping 2" and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250°F bronze construction, threaded or solder ends, bubble tight mineral filled. PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for tight shut-off. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4" threaded hose outlet connection. a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 70-100 or 70-200 2. Belimo 3. Hammond UP8313A or UP8303A 4. Milwaukee 5. Nibco PC-585-70 6. No other manufacturers approved C. Butterfly Valves 1. For piping 2-1/2" and larger. Install Norris Series, R-3011-23SS-2B, with weld neck flanges, double tapped lug, single flange ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 SS disc, stainless steel shaft with extended neck for insulated pipe EPDM seat and O-rings, indicated worm gear operator, 175 psig bubble tight pressure rating (250 where required). a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. ABZ 2. Bray 3. Demco 4. Grinnell 5. Keystone 6. Milwaukee 7. Norris 8. Rockwell 9. No other manufacturers approved D. Non-Slam Check Valves for Pump Discharge 1. 2" and Smaller: 125 psig WSP, silent, spring loaded, all stainless steel. a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Durabla 2. Valve and Primer Corporation 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 125 psi WSP, silent, semi-steel body, bronze trim and discs, bronze seats with center guide and renewable with reseating and special tools, guided spring. Spring shall operate in horizontal, vertical, angular, or upside down position. a. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Bell and Gossett 2. Clow 363 3. Miller 4. Mueller 5. Nibco/Scott The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 5 6. Smolensky E. Swing Check Valves 1. 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, threaded, Y-pattern, 200# WOG at swing check valve a. Crane No. 37 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, 200# WOG swing check valve with bronze trim a. Crane No. 373 2.3 DOMESTIC COLD WATER, DOMESTIC HOT WATER, AND DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN (COPPER PIPE) A. Ball Valves 1. Same as above B. Gate Valves 1. For piping larger than 2", American Flow Control, epoxy coated resilient seated, flanged gate valve C. Swing Check Valves 1. Same as above D. Water Pressure Relief Valves 1. For relief for heating system and chilled water system, Watts Series 40/140/240/340 rated for duty, pressure settings as required. Bell and Gossett, Conbraco, Watson MsDaniel. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Air Vent Valves: Stockham B-64, 300 psi working pressure, 3/8" bronze or Crane No. 88 B. Gauge Valves: Ball valve with Tee handle C. Valves are to be installed with bonnets at least 45 degrees above the horizontal to ensure debris does not collect in bonnet. 2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following 1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disk b. NPS 2-1/2 or Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring iron, metal-seat check valves The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 VALVES 230523 - 6 5. Drains Service (except Steam): Two-piece, full port bronze ball valves with bronze trim. To be installed with NPS 3/4 hose thread outlet and hose cap with chain PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate maintenance. Provide separate support where necessary. B. Install valves with stems horizontal or above center of pipe to prevent stem filling with debris. C. All branch lines which supply a specific area of the building (such as a lab) shall be valved near the main so that each area may be isolated from the system for repairs without having to shut down both men and women’s restrooms, other areas, or the whole building. D. Make all valves located above non-lay-in type ceiling or behind a wall accessible by means of an access door. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install chainwheels on operators for ball, butterfly and plug valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. 1. Extend chainwheel for chains to 60 inches above finished floor. END OF SECTION 230523 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 1 SECTION 230529 - MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Supporting Devices section, and is part of each Division 21, 22, and 23 section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 21, 22, and 23 sections. B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments and In-Beds. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. 7. Anchors. 8. Equipment Supports. C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. D. Relate this section to Section 230548 regarding seismic and vibration control. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 2 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved. 3. MSS Standard Compliance: a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer’s published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. B. Adjustable Steel Clevises Hangers: MSS Type 1. (For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines; ½” to 30".) C. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. (For suspension of pipe requiring up to 4" of insulation and where flexibility of clamp is desirable; 3/4" to 24".) D. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. (For suspension of cold pipe lines or hot lines where little or no insulation is required; ½" to 24".) E. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. (For suspension of piping when off-center closure allowing installation of hanger before erection of piping is desired; ½" to 4".) F. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) G. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) H. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines, ½" to 8".) I. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 8".) J. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) K. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) L. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. (For support of heavy loads; ½" to 30".) The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 3 M. Clips: MSS Type 26. (For support of uninstalled piping not subject to expansion or contraction.) N. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base-support and cast-iron floor flange. (To support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor 4" to 36".) O. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. (To Type 36 except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe.) 2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer’s published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. (For support and steadying of pipe risers; 3/4" to 20". Also supports pipe covering or insulation.) C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. (When longer ends are required for riser clamps.) 2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.) C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.) D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.) E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments.) 2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS AND IN-BEDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS Types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer’s published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.) C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist construction, for attachment to top flange of structural shape.) D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.) E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 4 beams.) F. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.) G. C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.) H. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange.) I. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.) J. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) K. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.) M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: 1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds. 2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds. 3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds. N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.) O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired.) P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movements where head room is limited.) Q. Refer to drawings for Unistrut inserts. 2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; see section Mechanical Insulation for void fill requirements. Use for roller supports and on all pipes 10" and larger. C. Protection Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation. D. Thermal Hanger Shields: See section mechanical Insulation. E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of one of the following: 1. Elcen Metal Products Co. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.6 CHANNEL STRUT SUPPORT A. General: Provide complete channel strut system including but not limited to concrete channel inserts, exposed channel pieces, angle brackets, fasteners, pipe clamps, bolts, nuts, rods, etc. B. Imbedded concrete inserts shall have a 2,000 lbs per foot carrying capacity and be equal to B-Line B22I with Styrofoam filler. C. Exposed channels shall have a 2,000 lbs per foot carrying capacity and be equal to B- Line B22. D. Supports carrying copper pipe shall be coated to create approved separation between copper and supports or use cushion separation system. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 5 E. Channel supports systems shall be 5'-0" OC in tunnels spacing elsewhere as specified. F. Install per manufacturer’s requirements. 2.7 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: 1. Kin-Line, Inc. 2. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International 3. ITT Grinnel Corp. 4. B-Line 5. Unistrut 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. Use Embeco grout for non-shrink applications. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from factory built channel (Unistrut) system and use factory fasteners for channel steel shapes, selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to manufacturer’s recommendations and Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors with associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 6 A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. 1. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed of adjacent similar piping. C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape. D. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G. Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. I. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long minimum) at support points. J. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 7 C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contracting of piping. 3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work Division 23. Sizes based to extend a minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer’s templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer’s touch-up paint or equivalent. END OF SECTION 230529 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 1 SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control section, and is part of each Division 21, 22 and 23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work installed under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment. Work to be responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective seismic zone. Zone 3, importance factor of 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and manufactured products to prepare the required computation, shop drawings and special devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following: 1. Amber Booth 2. Kinetics 3. Mason B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a minimum of two specific periods. 1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved devices. 2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device installation and preparing certification of the seismic vibration- isolation work. C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor concerning: 1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment including owner furnished and contractor installed. 2. Vibrations mounting of equipment. 3. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements. 4. Snubbing of equipment. 5. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork piping and conduit. 6. Provision for expansion and vibration of piping. 7. Concrete and/or steel pads or bases to assure proper mounting of restraints and The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 2 isolators. 8. Vibration isolation of exhaust fans. D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete. E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection, equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint locations and type of restraints. B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer’s recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidlines for Seismic Restraints. D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed. E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor belts, sole plates and other support steel for restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United States. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition) 1. International Building Code 2. NFPA bulletin 90A 3. UL Standard 181 4. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical System and Plumbing Piping Systems. Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California. PART II - PRODUCTS: 2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist seismic forces in all directions. A. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraint shall allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 3 1/4" clearance both horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality Assurance (QA) Program. B. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used where equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers. Isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure. C. Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members. 1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE: A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except as noted.) 3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT-PIPING AND CONDUIT: A. General: All piping and conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to accommodate thermal movement while at the same time restraining seismic motion. Tanks and vessels connected to piping shall be restrained in the same manner as the piping. B. Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to: 1. At all drops or risers to equipment connections. 2. At all changes in direction of piping and conduit. 3. At all horizontal runs of pipe and conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging with restraints not to exceed the following: a. Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum b. Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum 4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints. 5. On both sides of flexible connectors. C. Exceptions: 1. Conduit under 2-1/2" size and piping under 1-1/2" size need not be additionally seismically restrained except as follows: a. Brace all piping and conduit 1-1/4" and larger in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms. b. Brace all fuel gas and oil piping, medical gas piping and compressed air piping 1" and larger. 2. Seismic bracing may be omitted: a. When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure member and the pipe or conduit is suspended by an individual hanger. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 4 b. On all piping 3/4" and smaller. 3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT INSULATED PIPING: Where piping is designated to be insulated, the points of support shall be protected by a 360° sheet metal shield. Insert insulation shall be of the same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. (Pipe Shields, Inc.) The sheet metal shield wrapped around the insert shall be of the following lengths and gauge thickness. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE ½ - 1-1/2" 4" 20 2-6" 6" 20 8-10" 9" 16 12-18" 12" 16 20 and up 18" 16 3.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - PIPING AT FIRE-WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION WHERE WALL IS USED AS A RESTRAINT: A. Bare Pipe: Encase pipe in minimum 24 gauge sheet metal can sized for one inch spacing between pipe and outer diameter of can. Spacing shall be packed in accordance with fire resistant/retardant materials in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING. B. Insulated Pipe: Encase in adjustable or fixed length cans, minimum 24 gauge, sized for maximum one inch spacing between insulation and outer diameter of can. Insulation shall consist of 360° insert sized to extend a minimum of 1" beyond wall or floor penetration and of the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Spacing between shield and can shall be packed in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING. 3.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GROOVED PIPING: A. Where grooved piping is selected as the piping system, it must be seismically restrained as well as provide for thermal movement. B. Pipes may not be fastened to differently moving structures such as a wall or a ceiling, or a ceiling and a floor. The intent is to have the piping system move with the structure and not separate from it. C. In general, grooved piping shall be provided with additional flexible couplings to allow extreme deflections to occur, yet restrained to prevent movement beyond the limits of the flexible connections. Linear movement shall be incorporated as a part of the flexible connections or in a swing joint arrangement. D. Groove piping systems shall be separated, analyzed and submitted from threaded or welded piping systems. 3.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK: A. Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 5 1. At all equipment connections. 2. At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing). 3. Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C. 4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum. B. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of restraint members. C. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member and attached at the top of the duct as well as sides and bottom. 3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION: A. General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. Review isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project criteria. B. Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately 1/10 that of the related driving frequency. C. Equipment to Include: 1. Exhaust Fans: Vibration isolated and seismic restrained on steel spring base. D. Field Verify: All required devices and installation. 3.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK AND PIPING: A. Furnish and install devices to isolate all piping and ductwork from other moving equipment. Provide flex connections, spring hangers, grooved joint couplings for pipe, etc., as required. END OF SECTION 230548 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Label all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters for all mechanical equipment. Label all fire dampers, fire smoke dampers, smoke damper access doors. PART II - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION: A. Equipment: 1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or in these specifications. Make equipment nameplates of white face formica with black engraved lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely. 2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable: Identification name. Identification number. Capacity specified. Actual capacity. Area or zone served. Note operating conditions, including head or static pressure, RPM, motor horsepower at design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant, frequency of lubrication. B. Valve Identification: 1. For all valves, regardless of size, provide brass tags at least 1-1/4" by 3" in size and 0.051 inches thick. Use engraved lettering at least 1/8" high. Identify each valve on the drawing separately, and with valve tags matching the drawing identification. 2. Provide valve tags which include the following minimum information: a. Normal Position b. Duty The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 2 3. Identify tag numbers as follows: Valve Tags Duty 1 - 99 HW 100 - 199 CHW 200 - 299 CW 300 - 399 DWC & DWH 400 - 499 FIRE 500 - 599 AIR 600 - 699 DEM W 700 - 799 GLY H 800 - 899 HTW 900 - 999 NG 1000 - 1099 N2 1100 - 1199 VACUUM 1200 - 1299 ICW & ICH 1300 - 1399 STEAM 4. Make a schedule of all tagged valves, include in O&M Manuals. 5. Connect valve tags to valve stems or handles with brass chain or hooks. C. Color code all accessible duct and piping to identify with wording and arrows every 50 feet, at each riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily identify the medium transported. D. Identify duct and piping systems by: 1. Lettering color, and 2. Flow Direction Arrow 3. Identification lettering shall be applied by use of self-adhesive labels with band ends on pipe without vinyl jack cover or directly applies to vinyl jacketed piping, duct shall be stenciled and piping as a alternate. Letters shall be 2" high for duct and for 3"or larger piping, 1" high for 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" pipe, and ½" for 1" pipe and smaller. 4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be applied to match the method used for the lettering on the duct or pipe in the same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the lettering. On duct and 3" or larger piping, the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2" long and 1" wide. Smaller piping, 2-1/2" or less, shall have arrows with a shaft ½" wide and 2" long. Use a double-headed arrow if the flow can be in either direction. 5. Piping and duct shall be identified with the following colors: 6. Label existing high temperature water piping. Medium in Banding Identifying Abbreviation & Pipe or Duct Color Lettering Lettering Color Chilled Water Supply One Blue Chilled Water CHWS Black Supply Chilled Water Return One Blue Chilled Water CHWR Black Return The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 3 Laboratory Chilled Tow Blue Lab. Chilled Water LCHWS Black Water Supply Supply Laboratory Chilled Two Blue Lab. Chilled Water LCHWR Black Water Return Return Condenser Water One Brown Condenser Water CONDS Black Supply One Yellow Supply Condenser Water One Brown Condenser Water CONDR Black Return One Yellow Return Steam One Orange Steam STEAM Black One Brown Condensate One Orange Condensate COND Black One Brown High Temperature One Orange High Temp. Water HTWS Black Water Supply Supply High Temperature One Orange High Temp. Water HTWR Black Water Return Return Heating Water Supply One Yellow Heating Water BHWS Black (Bldg. Heat) One Orange Supply Heating Water One Yellow Heating Water BHWR Black Return (Bldg. Heat) One Orange Return Glycol Heating One Purple Glycol Heating GLY HS Black Supply Supply Glycol Heating One Purple Glycol Heating GLY HR Black Return Return Domestic (Potable) One Green Domestic Cold DCW Black Cold Water Water Domestic (Potable) One Green Domestic Hot DWH Black Hot Water One Yellow Water Domestic Hot One Green Domestic Hot DHWR Black Water Return One Yellow Water Return Industrial Cold One Gray Industrial Cold ICW Black Water Water The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 4 Industrial Hot One Gray Industrial Hot IHW Black Water One Yellow Water Industrial Hot One Gray Industrial Hot IHWR Black Water Return One Yellow Water Return System Make-up Water One Gray System Make-Up MAKE-UP W Black Distilled Water One Gray Distilled Water DIST W Black One Orange Demineralized Water One Gray Demineralized DEM W Black One Blue Water Equipment Vacuum One Brown Equipment Vacuum EQP VAC Black Laboratory Vacuum One Brown Laboratory Vacuum LAB VAC Black Laboratory Gas One Yellow Laboratory Gas LAB GAS Black Laboratory Air One Aluminum Laboratory Air LA Black One Yellow Compressed Air One Aluminum Compressed Air AIR (100 psi) Black (Supplied psi) One Orange (Supplied psi) Control Air One Aluminum Control Air C AIR Black Nitrogen One Brown Nitrogen N2 Black Natural Gas Two Yellow Natural Gas NAT GAS (5 psi) Black (Supplied psi)(Supplied psi) Fuel Oil One Yellow Fuel Oil FUEL OIL Black One Black Fire Protection One Red Fire Protection FIRE Red Water Water Drain One Black Drain DRAIN Black Roof Drain One Black Roof Drain RD Black Building Waste One Black Waste WASTE Black Acid Waste One Black Acid Waste ACID WASTE Black One Orange The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 5 Acid Vent One Black Acid Vent ACID VENT Black One Orenge Cold Air Supply Duct Cold Air Duct (Unit Served) - Black Hot Air Supply Duct Hot Air Duct (Unit Served) - Black Return Air Duct Return Air Duct (Unit Served) - Black Exhaust Air Duct Exhaust Air Duct (Unit Served) - Black Supply Duct Supply Duct (Unit Served) - Black Fire, Smoke, Fire/Smoke Damper Fire, Smoke, Fire/Smoke Damper Access Doors AD - Red 2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION: A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved white face formica with balck engraved lettering labels. B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved white face formica labels with black engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device. C. Numerically or alphabetically code all panel wiring and tubing. END OF SECTION 230553 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Work of this section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions of this contract, the General Mechanical Requirements, General Electrical Requirements and other sections where this work shares a responsibility. B. System commissioning and startup of mechanical systems shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors with the participation of the Electrical Contractor related to electrical work and the General Contractor related to general construction items. C. Testing and Balancing shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor under the direction of the General Contractor with the full participation of all the mechanical and electrical trades employed on the project and shall include the participation of an independent testing and balance contractor to coordinate all elements of the work and to perform special technical services outlined herein. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of: 1. Air conditioning equipment including air distribution devices, supply ducts, air handling units, condensing units, fans, coils, and related equipment. 2. Hydronic systems including pumps water distribution systems, chillers, boilers, heat exchangers, coils and related equipment. B. System Commissioning - Extent of Work: 1. The work required by this section includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. The pre-startup inspection of all systems and subsequent correction of any incorrect items. b. The initial first run inspections. c. System operations inspections. 2. The intent of this work is to provide for proper installation, startup, service and operation of the mechanical systems in preparation for system balancing. 3. Repair, replacement or adjustment of each item shall be performed by the installing contractor. 4. Involves all new construction and those elements of existing construction which are affected by this project. C. Testing and Balancing - Extent of Work: 1. This work incorporates a confirming checkout of construction work, an The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 2 individual component activation and an overall system activation into one work program which shall serve as the transition period from Contractor’s job to Owner’s facility. 2. The TAB Contractor shall be skilled in the operation and manipulation of systems and in the direction of parties involved in the work. 3. Conduct and participate in the startup and shakedown of all mechanical systems installed and modified in this contract; test, adjust and balance these systems to obtain optimum performance at a level which minimizes the required energy input, prepare and submit at complete report of work done and the final system condition obtained, participate in the instruction of Owner’s personnel in the proper operation of systems and equipment. 4. Involves all new construction and those elements of existing construction which are affected by this project. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. B. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB) - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing D. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) - National Standards for Total System Balance. E. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Adjusting: Varying of system flow by modifying settings of dampers and valves, in combination with varying speeds to obtain optimum operating conditions for the entire system. B. Balancing: Proportioning of air and hydronic flows through system mains, branches, and terminal devices using standardized procedures to obtain specified air or hydronic flow while imposing the least amount of restriction on the HVAC system. C. Testing: Use of specialized and calibrated instruments to measure temperatures, pressures, rotational speeds, electrical characteristics, air and hydronic flow in velocities or quantities used in evaluating the performance of a HVAC system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Representatives of the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, etc., and the The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 3 Electrical Contractor shall be available on a daily basis through the commissioning and adjustment period. These men shall be experienced journeymen with prior experience in system operation and with specific experience on the construction project. B. Qualifications of Test and Balance Firm 1. Testing and Balancing shall be performed by a testing agency who specializes in testing, adjusting and balancing of heating, ventilating, air-moving equipment, air-conditioning systems and hydronic systems and has a minimum of one year experience. 2. Testing agency shall have successfully completed a minimum of five projects, similar in size and scope. 3. Testing agency shall be a certified member to TABB, AABC and/or NEBB. 4. Balance agencies approved for this work: a. Payson Sheet Metal, Payson, UT. (801-) 465-3018. Email: office@paysonsheetmetal.com C. Certifications 1. TAB Technician shall be certified by a nationally recognized certifying agency. D. Perform total system balance in accordance with Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB) - Quality Assurance Program for Environmental Systems Balance, AABC National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation and/or Total System Balance and/or NEBB Quality Assurance Program - Conformance Certification. E. The balancing work including air and hyrdonic portions shall be performed by the same firm having total responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire system. F. The independent testing and balancing firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make all necessary adjustments. G. After all tests and adjustments are made a detailed written report shall be prepared and submitted for review, and shall bear the signature of the professional supervising the work. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a complete and satisfactory report is received. Furnish two copies of the report. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall commence after HVAC systems installation is complete and in working order. Associated areas of general construction shall be in place including interior and exterior doors, windows, walls and ceilings. 1.7 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Provide warranty for period of 120 days following submission of completed report, The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 4 during which time, Owner may request a recheck of up to 10% of total number of terminals, or resetting of any outlet, coil, or device listed in the report. B. Warranty shall meet the requirements of the following program(s): 1. TABB - International Quality Assurance Program 2. AABC - National Project Performance Guarantee 3. NEBB - Conformance Certification PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-STARTUP INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental system(s), verify the following conditions: 1. Removal of shipping stops. 2. Vibration isolators properly aligned and adjusted. 3. Flexible connections properly aligned. 4. Belts properly adjusted. 5. Belt guards and safety shields in place. 6. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 7. Thermal overload protection is in place for fans, pumps, chillers, and other equipment. 8. Safety controls, safety valves and high or low limits in operation. 9. All systems properly filled. 10. Pumps are rotating correctly. 11. Start-up/construction strainers have been removed and all pertinent strainers are clean and in place. 12. Gauges and/or test ports are properly located for balancing. 13. Service and balance valves are fully open. 14. Hydronic systems are pressure tested, flushed, filled, and properly vented. 15. Leak testing on duct system has been performed in accordance with SMACNA standards or as specified. 16. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 17. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 18. Air outlets are installed and connected. 19. Fans and motors are rotating correctly. 20. Duct and fan systems are clean. 21. Final filters are clean and properly installed. 22. Automatic and manual dampers are installed correctly, operable and fully open. 23. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 24. Temperature control systems are installed, complete and operable. 25. Voltages match nameplate. 26. All interlock are wired and verified. 27. All other items necessary to provide for proper startup. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 5 a. If deficiencies are evident, submit Deficiency Report to Engineer/Architect. Do not begin testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems until deficiencies have been remedied. 3.2 FIRST RUN INSPECTION A. Recheck all items outlined in pre-startup inspection to insure proper operation. B. Check the following items: 1. Excessive vibration or noise. 2. Loose components. 3. Initial control settings. 4. Motor amperages. 5. Heat buildup in motors, bearings, etc. 6. Control system is properly calibrated and functioning as required. C. Correct all items which are not operating properly. 3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION A. Observe mechanical systems under operating conditions for sufficient time to insure proper operation under varying conditions, such as day-night and heating-cooling. 1. Periodically check the following items: a. Visual checks to air flow for “best guess” settings for preparation for system air balancing under section applying. b. Control operation, on-off sequences, system cycling, etc. c. Visual checks of water flow, seals, packing safety valves, operation pressures and temperature. d. Cleaning of excessive oil or grease. e. Dampers close tightly. f. Valves close tightly. g. System leaks. h. All other items pertaining to the proper operation of the mechanical system whether specifically listed or not. 3.4 TOTAL MECHANICAL SYSTEM BALANCE A. The mechanical systems balance involves elements of the work of the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor, the Mechanical Contractor, the Sheet Metal Contractor and the Controls Contractor. Total system balance requires that all elements be not only individually correct, but also correct as a composite system. Therefore, participation of all parties shall be required in the test and balance procedure. B. Prior to the beginning of work, a written description of the balance methods, equivalent to be used, and procedures of action shall be submitted to the Engineer/Owner for review The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 6 and comment. C. The testing and balance specialist shall review the contract drawings during the bid period and shall advise the Engineer of any modifications to the layout which may be needed to facilitate the balance procedure. Modifications will be incorporated into the contract by Addendum during the bidding period. D. The test and balance specialist shall visit the project at 50%, 80% and 90% completion, making a thorough inspection of those items which will affect his subsequent work. He shall advise the Contractor in writing with a copy to the Engineer/Architect of any work required by the contract which is not being performed adequately. This is in addition to the regular inspection efforts of the Architect and Engineer. Particularly note needed valves, dampers, access doors, thermometers, pressure gauges, belts and drives, diffuser styles, strainers and filters, etc. 3.5 AIR SYSTEMS BALANCE A. Before any adjustments are made, check the systems for such items as dirty filters, duct leakage, filter leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. Adjust all fan systems major duct sections, registers, diffusers, etc., to deliver design air quantities within ±5%. Individual air outlets, when one of three or more serve a space may have a tolerance of ±10% of the average. After balancing is completed check motor amperage with air filters clean. B. Adjust supply, exhaust and recirculation air systems towards air quantities shown on drawings. Establish a proper relationship between supply and exhaust. Follow proportional balance procedures outlined by AABC, SMACNA and/or TABB for such work. C. All thermal boxes, air flow measuring stations, and other devices shall be calibrated and verified for proper function. D. Distribution system shall be further adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system. Any changes to the design are to be submitted for approval and fully documented. E. Exchange sheaves and/or belts as needed to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. F. All balance procedures shall follow allowed procedure from the REFERENCES section (1.3 above). 3.6 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Before adjustments are made, clean strainers, check temperature control valve operations, check pump rotation, adjust pressure reducing valves, as required by sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 of this specification section. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 7 B. Using system flow meters, pressure gauges, and/or contact pyrometer, adjust the quantity of fluid handled by each pump and supplied to each coil, heat exchanger, etc., to meet design requirements. Use proportional balance techniques to minimize system pressure requirements. Adjust hydronic systems to provide ±10% of required design quantities. 1. Remove and trim pump impellers where throttling, and/or speed control exceeds 10% of adequate flow. C. Verify all hydronic system controls for proper function for coils, heat exchangers, and all other equipment with control valves. D. Use proportional balance techniques so that in every case, at least one terminal valve is set for full flow at wide open, and at least one branch is wide open at full flow, other equivalent. 3.7 MAJOR EQUIPMENT A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall work with the Controls Contractor, and Electrician in placing heat exchangers, pumps, fans and other major equipment in operation. The factory representative of the equipment manufacturer shall also participate in a team effort to place the system(s) in operation, adapt to all anticipated operating modes and make adjustments as required to obtain correct operation. The Design Engineer and the Owner’s Representative shall witness the final operating sequences. 3.8 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall go through the entire control system with the Controls Contractor verifying proper operation of each and every device and the proper function of each system. Certify such effort in the report. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS: A. Observe and note all furnished thermal overload protection in the data sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, the trade which furnished the overload devices shall furnish and install the correct size overload protection devices. It shall be the responsibility of the balancing firm to confirm that proper overload protection has been installed at the completion of the job. B. Measure and set any special conditions such as minimum air quantities; coordinate outside air, return air and relief air damper operation; check and adjust outside and return air intakes so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make tests and record data as required in “REPORT” below. C. Permanently mark setting of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing for settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 8 closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. Upon request, based on perceived need, make 24-hour space temperature recordings. Any required re-balance of the system shall be performed without additional cost. F. Upon request, a representative of the balancing firm performing the work shall demonstrate fluid flow quantities shown in the report by reading back outlets or terminals selected specifically or at random by the Design Engineer. It is understood that the operating mode of the system shall be the same for read-back as it was during balancing. If system is found to be outside the specified balance requirements, the balancing agency shall re-balance the entire system at no cost to the Owner. 3.10 REPORT A. Provide a bound report in four copies containing a general information sheet listing instruments used, method of balancing, altitude correction, and manufacturer’s grille, register and diffuser data. B. Electric Motors 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate and operating 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore C. Belt Drives 1. Identification/Location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4. Belt manufacturer, size and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual D. Pumps 1. Identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Size/model 4. Impeller 5. Service 6. Design flow rate, pressure drop 7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop 8. Discharge pressure The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 9 9. Suction pressure 10. Total operating head pressure 11. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures 12. Shut off, total head pressure E. Combustion Equipment 1. Boiler manufacturer 2. Model number 3. Serial number 4. Heat output F. Air Cooled Condensers 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Manufacturer 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 8. Number of compressors, refrigerant suction/discharge pressures 9. Refrigerant type G. Chillers 1. Identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Capacity 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual 7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual 8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual 9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual 10. Condenser entering water temperature 11. Condenser leaving water temperature 12. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual 13. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual 14. Number of compressors, refrigerant suction/discharge pressures 15. Refrigerant type H. Cooling Tower 1. Tower identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 10 5. Rated capacity 6. Entering air WB temperature, specified and actual 7. Leaving air WB temperature, specified and actual 8. Ambient air DB temperature 9. Condenser water entering temperature 10. Condenser water leaving temperature 11. Condenser water flow rate 12. Fan RPM I. Heat Exchangers 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Primary water flow, design and actual 5. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual 6. Secondary water flow, design and actual 7. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual J. Cooling Coils 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Water flow, design and actual K. Heating Coils and ATU Reheat Coils 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Water flow, design and actual L. Electric Duct Heaters and ATU Reheat Coils 1. Manufacturer 2. Identification/number 3. Location 4. Model number 5. Design kW 6. Number of stages/control type 7. Phase, voltage, amperage 8. Test voltage (each phase) 9. Test amperage (each phase) 10. Air flow, specified and actual 11. Temperature rise, specified and actual M. Air Moving Equipment The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 11 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow specified and actual 9. Static pressure profile across each component 10. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 11. Inlet pressure 12. Discharge pressure 13. Filter type, MERV rating, sizes and quantity 14. Filter differential pressure N. Return Air/Outside Air 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow 8. Return air temperature 9. Outside air temperature 10. Mixed air temperature 11. Design outside/return air ratio 12. Actual outside/return air ratio O. Exhaust/Relief Fans 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure P. Duct Traverses 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design air flow 5. Test velocity The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 12 6. Test air flow 7. Duct Static Pressure 8. Air temperature 9. Air correction factor, if required by necessary device Q. Duct Leak Tests 1. Description of ductwork under test 2. Duct design operating pressure 3. Duct design test static pressure 4. Duct capacity, air flow 5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 6. Test apparatus a. Blower b. Orifice, tube size c. Orifice size d. Calibrated 7. Test static pressure 8. Test orifice differential pressure 9. Leakage R. Air Monitoring Stations 1. Identification/location 2. System 3. Size 4. Area 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow S. Room Pressure Monitors 1. Identification/location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Design differential pressure/setpoint 5. Actual differential pressure 6. Supply air CFM 7. Return/exhaust air CFM T. Flow Measuring Stations 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Size 4. Manufacturer 5. Model number The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 13 6. Serial number 7. Design flow rate 8. Design pressure drop 9. Actual/final pressure drop 10. Actual/final flow rate 11. Station calibrated setting U. Flow Balancing Valves 1. Identification/location 2. Manufacturer 3. Design flow rate 4. Actual inlet and outlet pressure 5. Actual flow rate (GPM) 6. Setpoint identification/number V. Air Terminal Unit Data 1. Manufacturer 2. Type (constant, variable, cooling only, dual duct) 3. Identification/number 4. Location 5. Inlet Size 6. Minimum design air flow 7. Maximum cooling design air flow 8. Maximum cooling actual air flow 9. Maximum heating design air flow 10. Maximum heating actual air flow 11. Unoccupied design air flow 12. Unoccupied actual air flow W. Air Distribution Tests 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor, when used for balancing 6. Design air flow 7. Test (final) air flow 8. Percent of design air flow X. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all supply, return and exhaust outlets or inlets, and be totaled and summarized by systems. Y. Hydronic balancing data sheets shall list required temperature or pressure differentials used for balancing coils, radiations, condensers, etc. Sheets shall show in comparison final as-balanced versus design values. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 14 Z. Include a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked for easy identification of the signation used in the data sheets. AA. Note any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above. AB. Keep a daily log of all work performed, with a list of work scheduled for each day and the workers on the job. END OF SECTION 230593. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 1 SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Division-23, Section 230000 - General Mechanical Requirements applies to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This work as indicated on the drawings and schedules, is required by the International Energy Code, and this section. No product with asbestos is to be used in this project. Any insulation that is damaged during work on the project is to be replaced and/or repaired. B. Types of mechanical insulation in this section include the following: 1. Ductwork System Insulation a. Fiberglass b. Rigid Flexible Wrap 2. Piping Systems Insulation a. Fiberglass b. High Temperature Water Piping Insulation Repair C. Refer to Division-23 section “Supports and Anchors” for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields. D. Refer to Division-23 section “Ductwork” for duct linings. E. Refer to Division-23 section “System Identification” for installation of identification devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications 1. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of insulation used for mechanical systems. This firm shall specialize in the manufacture of insulation of similar size, type and have been in use for not less than 3 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications 1. Firm shall have at least 5 years experience on projects of a similar size, type and function as this project. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 2 C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulaton, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics, and adhesives) with flame-spread index of a 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 225) method. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each piece of equipment on this project. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer’s product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, glues, cements and any other adhesives needed, in containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect any and all insulation from dirt, water, and chemical damage. Remove any damaged insulation from the job site; do not install any damaged or wet insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Provide mechanical insulation materials from one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div. 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. 5. Manville Products Corp. 6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1. Class 1 - 400°F (204°C); Class 2 - 400°F (204°C); Class 3 - 850°F (454°C); Class 4 - 1000°F (538°C); Class 5 - 1800°F (982°C); Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft^3; Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12lbs/ft^3; Class 5 - 20 lbs/ft^3. B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 533, Type I, Class B-4. Type 1 - resilient, flexible; Class B-1 - 0.65 lbs/ft^3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft^3; Class B-3 - 1.0 lbs/ft^3; Class B-4 - 1.5 lbs/ft^3; Class B-5 - 2.0 lbs/ft^3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft^3; Type II - flexible; Class F-1 - 4.5 lbs/ft^3; Type III - semirigid; Class F-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft^3. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 3 C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes ad similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.3 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS A. Preformed Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547. (Class 1 for use to 450°F (230°C); Class 2 for use to 650°F (345°C); Class 3 for use to 1200°F (650°C).) B. Flexible, Unicellular Pipe Insulation: Closed-cell elastomeric, preformed, with heat fusion or contact cement joining system. Insulation may be compressed but not stretched. By Armaflex II or Rubatex. C. All insulation exposed to sunlight or installed outdoors shall be protected with two coats of Armstrong Wb Armaflex Finish. D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: All purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option. E. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer’s recommendation. F. Encase exterior fittings insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. G. Encase suction diffusers in a removable/replaceable insulating box. H. Staples, Bands, Wires and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. I. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. J. Insulation: Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. K. Thermal Hanger Shields: constructed of 360 degrees insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 4 2.4 PIPING SEALANT THROUGH WALLS: See also Section Mechanical Firestopping. A. Sealant shall be two part foamed silicone elastomer. Acceptable products are: 1. Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV foam 2. 3M 3. Spec Seal by STI B. Sealant shall be applied to any piping or ductwork penetrating through fire or smoke walls to prevent air from passing through the opening. C. Sealant cell structure, foamed in place, shall be U.L. classified and shall meet the smoke development and fuel contribution ratings specified. Sealant shall be stable at extreme temperatures, and shall effectively confine such hazards as fire, smoke and gases. D. Sealant required at any fire/smoke wall penetration to be according to approved detail for each specific wall assembly. Contractor shall submit detail to Engineer for approval. 2.5 PIPE JACKETING A. Provide and install jacketing for insulated pipe exposed in any room in the project. This is in addition to standard foil on Kraft jacketing (ASJ). 1. Domestic water, heating water, other insulated piping a. PVC sheets, 0.30" thickness b. PVC formed fitting covers c. Solvent welded joints and seams d. (Provide for removal and expansion) B. All joints and seams caulked and sealed water tight. C. Color of jacketing shall be white. 2.6 FIRE/SMOKE ENCASEMENT A. Any and all PVC that is non plenum rated, along with any other piping located in return air and supply air plenums are to be encased in rated flame and smoke system. “Plastic Pipe Fire Protection System” by Firemaster or equivalent product is to be used. The enclosure shall meet all codes. 2.7 FLEXIBLE FIRE WRAP A. Flexible fire protection wrap is to be used to wrap the fireplace hood, and shall meet requirements established by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and the National Fire Protections Association (NFPA) for fire-rated grease ducts. Install wrap per manufacturer’s code and official’s requirements. B. Approved Manufacturer’s Include: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 5 1. Certainteed “Flame Check” 2. Thermal Ceramics “FireMaster” 3. Pabco “Super Firestamp” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass, one-piece preformed pipe insulation, class related to temperature, with all purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, additional jacketing as noted. B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and covered with Zeston covers. C. All cold water, chilled water, roof drains or any other lines upon which condensate moisture could form, shall have a vapor-proof jacket. D. Fire and smoke hazard for a complete insulation system shall not exceed 1. Flame spread - 25 2. Fuel contribution - 50 3. Smoke development - 50 E. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified as being insulated. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Examine areas under which pipes or ductwork are to be insulated, do not proceed with work until Installer finds conditions acceptable after being corrected by Contractor. 3.3 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION A. Insulation Not Required: Do not insulate lined ductwork. B. Hot, Cold and Dual Temperature Ductwork: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet. b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet. 1. Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers. c. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC unit inlet. 1. Except omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums. d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined e. HVAC relief air plenums and ductwork The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 6 2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation. a. Rigid fiberglass: Class 1, 1-1/2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan and equipment rooms. b. Flexible fiberglass: Type 1, Class B-4, 1-1/2" lb/ft^3 density, 1-1/2" thick, application limited to concealed locations. C. High and Medium Velocity Duct: Insulate externally with type 1, class B-4 (1-1/2 lb/ft^3 density) 1-1/2" thick fiberglass faced duct wrap with factory applied foil scrim Kraft facing U.L. 723 labe. D. Duct Insulations 1. Wrap insulation snugly on the ductwork such that maximum thickness is maintained. Butt all circumferential joints and overlap longitudinal joints a minimum of 2". Adhere insulation with 4" strips of Insulation Bonding Adhesive, at 8" on center. 2. On circumferential joints, staple the 2" flange of the facing with 9/16" flare-door staples on 6" centers and taped with minimum 3" wide foil reinforcing Kraft tape. Tape all pin penetrations or punctures on the facing. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature) 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment a. Roof drain bodies b. Factory insulated surfaces do not need to be field insulated c. Chilled water pump suction diffuser B. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: 1. Fiberglass: 2" thick for surfaces above 35°F (2°C) and 3" thick for surfaces 35°F (2°C) and lower. 2. Cellular Glass: 3" thick for surfaces above 35°F (2°C) and 4-1/2" thick for surfaces 35°F (2°C) and lower. 3. Flexible Unicellular: 1" thick for cold and chilled surfaces 3.5 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Insulation Omitted: Insulation is not needed on the following: 1. Chrome-plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures) 2. Air chambers 3. Union strainers check valves 4. Balance cocks 5. Flow regulators The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 7 6. Drain lines from water coolers 7. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels 8. Fire protection piping 9. Pre-insulated equipment B. Cold Piping 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems a. Laboratory microscope chilled water piping, supply and return 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thickness of insulation a. Flexible Unicellular, self sealing longitudinal joint: b. 1" thickness, glued joint C. Hot Piping 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems a. Potable hot water piping b. Potable hot water recirculating piping c. Hot drain piping (where indicated) 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass with all service jacket, self-sealing lap: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". b. Flexible Unicellular: ½" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2" (underground only, largest size permitted) 3.6 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Insulation Omitted: Insulation is not needed for the following: 1. Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets 2. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan 3. Heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space 4. Condensate piping between steam trap and unions 5. Unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints B. Cold Piping 40°F (4.4°C) to Ambient: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems a. HVAC make-up water piping b. All HVAC chilled water piping c. Heat recovery water piping 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 8 C. Hot Pressure Piping (to 250°F): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems (water piping up to 200°F). a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping, valves and fittings b. Low pressure steam and condensate piping c. Medium pressure steam and condensate piping, valves and fittings 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". 3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General: Insulation is to be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions and recognized industry standards to ensure that the insulation will serve it’s intended purpose. B. Insulation is to be installed using materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Ductwork is to be cleaned and dried before installation of insulation. When two or more pieces of insulation are to be used, butt adjoining pieces together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces that are being covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, insulation is not needed where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings are in place. G. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer. H. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on exernal corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. Insulation is to be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions and recognized industry standards to ensure that the insulation will serve it’s intended purpose. B. Insulation is only to installed after the system has been leak tested and is found to be in proper working condition. C. Insulation materials are to be installed with smooth and even surfaces. Each continuous The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 9 run is to be insulated with full length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Partial pieces or scraps butted up to each other shall not be used. D. Pipes shall be cleaned and dried before insulation is installed. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installers’ option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. When pipe is extended through walls, floors or other penetrations, the insulation shall extend through all penetrations uninterrupted, except where otherwise indicated. H. Provide neatly beveled edge at all terminations and interruptions of insulation. I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. J. Saddles and Shields: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide protection saddles or thermal hanger shields with protection shields under all piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and thermal shields for exact fit to mate with piping insulation. 2. Protection Saddles: See section Supports and Anchors for saddle. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/4" and smaller. Use with thermal hanger shields for pipes 1-1/2" and larger. 4. Thermal Hanger Shields: High density calcium silicate encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/2" to 8". 3.9 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR A. If any existing insulation is damaged as part of this project, it is to be repaired using insulation of the same thickness as existing, and jacketed and sealed to match existing insulation as needed. 3.10 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Any insulation that is damaged beyond repair is to be replaced, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 10 B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor on how best to protect insulation after installation so as to avoid deterioration and damage. END OF SECTION 230700 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 1 SECTION 232000 - GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division-23 General Pipes and Fittings section, and is part of ea ch Division-23 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. C. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several other sections of this specification. B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following 1. Steel Piping 2. Copper Piping 3. Cast-Iron Piping 4. Cast-Iron Soil Piping 5. Grooved Joint Piping 6. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished by manufacturer as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms normally engaged in the manufacture of pipes and pipe fittings of similar type, use and service on similar sized projects, whose products have been in satisfactory use for a minimum of 5 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications 1. Firms having worked successfully on similar size projects for at least 3 years. 2. Firms having a contractor’s license in the state of Utah and in their origin state, if applicable 3. Firms having publicly bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this project, and any work in progress by the Contractor. 4. All workers on the project are to carry state licenses as journeymen, with additional certification for welders. C. Welding Certification The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 2 1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past 6 months of commencing work on this project. 2. The certification test is to be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding Qualifications”, ASME Section VII, and ANSI 313. 3. The test report is to state that the welder is qualified to weld the material used on the job, and in the locations indicated (flat, vertical, overhead, etc). 4. Submit 3 copies of each welder’s certification test to Project Manager for approval prior to commencing work. No welder is to do any work on the job site until he has the approval of the Project Manager. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Codes and Standards 1. Welding: Qualify welders, operators and welding procedures in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. 2. Brazing: Certify brazers, operators and brazing procedures in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work. 3. NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes and pipe fittings bearing approval label by national Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting are to be submitted. Piping schedule showing manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type and joint type are also to be submitted for each piping system. B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical fitting. Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pipe is to be stored in a way to prevent sagging and bending. B. Pipe and fittings are to be stored in a manner to prevent dirt and debris from entering piping. Steel and copper pipes and fittings are to be protected from weather where possible. When stored indoors or outdoors, store pipes above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. One end of the pipe is to be stored slightly elevated so as The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 3 to prevent accumulation of condensate, and pitting where condensate accumulates. C. Flanges and fittings are to be protected from moisture and dirt by being stored inside a storage enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade size and weight (wall thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, Installer shall provide recommendations for piping that comply with installation requirements and governing regulations and industry standards. Use United States (domestic) manufactured pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe. B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade class and pressure rating indicated for each pipe size and service. Pipe, tube, valve and equipment are to be the same size and type as the fittings used in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, government regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations are to be complied with, where applicable. Use United States (domestic) manufactured fittings only. Do not use foreign made fittings. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. Do not use Type M piping. B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280. D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASNI B 16.18 E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.22 F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29 H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26 I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 2.3 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 4 A. Black Steel Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A 53. B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691. F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting. G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. I. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated. J. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250°F. Equal to Walter Vallet Company V-line insulating coupling. K. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14 L. Steel Flangets/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Material Group: Group 1.1 2. End Connections: Buttwelding 3. Facings: Raised-face 4. Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service: AWWA C207. M. Forged-Steel and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe. N. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. O. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close- nipples). 2.4 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS (Only where acceptable) A. General: At Installer’s option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 5 used in lieu of welded, flanged or threaded methods, and may be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, expansion joints, expansion compensators or vibration reducers, only in systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230°F (110°C), excluding steam piping condensing water return to pump, and any other service not recommended by manufacturer. B. Coupling Housing Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridged pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer’s latest published literature. (Victaulic style 77). For rigid joints (Victaulic “Zero Flex” style 07). 1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. 2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. 3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized. C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal’s tightness, constructed or elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. 1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification. 2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer. D. Nuts and Bolts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. 1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts. E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B for 2" to 20" 4. Steel: ASTM A 234 G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 H. Specialties The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 6 1. Dielectric couplings. Victaulic Style 47. I. Grooves: Conform to the following 1. Standard Steel: Roll grooved 2. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606 J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of one of the following 1. Victualic Co. of America 2. Tyco K. Coordination with Section 230700: Insulation of coupled piping is more difficult and expensive than is that of welded piping related to couplings, coupling ears, and more involved support. Where coupled piping is used, include all extra cost in the proposal. Install such at no additional cost to the owner. 2.5 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401 B. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74 C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C 564 and stainless steel clamp holding band. D. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with same standards (ASTM A 74). E. Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIAL/PRODUCTS: A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing solders in domestic water applications. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. 2. Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS. C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 7 determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping connectors of the following: a. Fernco, Inc. F. Strainers 1. Y pattern, self cleaning, line size. Armstrong, Bailey, Crane, Fisher, Metraflex, Mueller, Sarco, Strong or Yarway. a. Iron Body, Screwed Ends 2" and Smaller: 250 psig at 425°F, screen mesh to suit service. b. Flanged Iron Body 2-1/2" and Larger: 125 psig steam pressure rating, screen mesh to suit service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Pipes and pipe fittings are to be installed so as to be permanently-leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure, and are to be installed according to recognized industry standards. Each run is to have the least amount of joints and couplings, but is to have adequate and accessible unions, flanges, etc., for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of any valves and equipment. When pipe sizes are to be reduced, reducing fittings are to be used. Piping is to be aligned correctly, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance with codes. 1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping B. Install pipe according to the following criteria:(except where otherwise noted) 1. Pipe is to be located vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) 2. Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible 3. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines 4. Hold piping close to: a. Walls b. Overhead construction The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 8 c. Columns d. Other clearance up to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment piping e. Allow for insulation thickness, if any 5. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation 6. In finished spaces, where possible, conceal piping from view, by locating pipes in: a. Inside column enclosures b. In hollow wall construction c. Above suspended ceilings d. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. 7. Provide high point vents, low point drains with valves and extension to drain for all piping. 8. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and it’s equipment. C. All piping in mechanical rooms, fan rooms, etc., is to remain exposed. Do not conceal or embed piping in walls, floors or other structures. D. Any changes in direction the pipe is running, or the size of the pipe itself is toe be made with manufactured fittings. Piping is to be anchored and supported so as to allow for free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building. E. Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways clear. F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate maintenance. G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, gas cocks, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc. H. Erect all piping to insure proper draining. Domestic water, chilled water, and heating water shall slope down a minimum of 1" per 40 feet toward drains. Pitch standpipes down to fire department connections a minimum of 1" per 40 feet. Slope soil, waste, vent, and roof drains lines in accordance with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code, or International Plumbing Code. I. On horizontal straight runs of pipe, use eccentric reducers with straight side on top for water piping. J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Pipes are not to be run through transformer vaults or other electrical rooms. Do not run pipes above electrical equipment, unless specifically authorized and directed. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 9 A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31. D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. E. Welded: 1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C) where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50°F. b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5° angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt. c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20". d. Build up welds with stringer-based pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusion. e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; re-fabricate to comply with requirements. f. At Installer’s option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular “T” fitting. g. At Installer’s option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe of size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular “T” fitting. F. Flanged Joints: Match flanged within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. G. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer’s installation instructions. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer’s instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 10 with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.3 PIPING TEST A. General: Temporary pumps and gages are to be provided for testing. When possible, pressure test is to be done before insulation is installed, and all control devices are to be removed before pressure test is to be done. Each natural section of piping system is to be tested independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure ratings. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Test is to be done for a minimum of 2 hours. 2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or pressure rating. 3. Test each piping system of 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure. 4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Notifications: Notice that the test is to be done shall be submitted for review at least 10 days before test is to be done. Tests shall be made prior to painting, insulating or covering of any joints and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping. C. Inspections: Piping is to be inspected by the Contractor while the system is under hydrostatic pressure. Copies of the inspection shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not hydrostatically tested may be x-ray tested. D. Where piping does not pass required piping test, the pipe is to be replaced by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to the extent needed to overcome leakage. No chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics or other temporary repair methods. E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31. G. Test waste, drain and vent systems in accordance with local plumbing code and these specifications. Repair failed sections by disassembly and reinstallation. H. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent requirements. 3.4 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND INSPECTING A. General: Exteriors of pipes are to be cleaned of any superfluous materials, and prepared for application of specified coatings (if any). Piping systems are be flushed with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Flushing shall consist of not less than six (6) short intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Each flush is to sampled and tested for cleanliness. Inspect each run of system for completion of joints, The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 11 supports and accessory items. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. B. Water mains and water service piping are to be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C601. C. Clean, flush as above and treat heating and cooling systems in accordance with Sections chemical treatment. Certify by signature of Contractor and Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION 232000. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 1 SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPNG AND SPECIALTIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Mechanical Requirements” are a part of the work described in this section. B. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings” are a part of the work described in this section. C. Other Specification sections related to Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing. 1.2 SUMMARY: Work shown on the drawings and required by these specifications including incidental work classified as “best practices of the trade”. A. Heating water systems. B. Other work as indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hydronic piping products and equipment of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in service for not less than 5 years. B. Installers Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least 3 years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical literature indicating source, brand, type, model, performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc. B. Record Drawings: See Division 23. C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment including a comprehensive system operating description. See Section 23 01 00. D. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel: Participate in specified instruction. See Division 23. 1. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner’s beneficial use (substantial completion). 2. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices. 1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations 2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels 3. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Codes The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 2 4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code/International Plumbing Code 5. ASHRAE Handbooks PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS - HEATING WATER 2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS: A. Schedule 40 black steel, A-53 with malleable steel threaded fittings up to 2" size and forged steel welding fittings 2-1/2" and larger. Contractor option to use a grooved joint system accommodating for additional support and insulation work. 1. Rigid type “K” or “L” copper, bronze or dielectric interface. B. Drains and Overflow: Install piping of any size from drains and overflows using type K or L copper piping with Solder joint type wrought copper of wrought bronze fittings. Drains and over flows shall be terminated over floor drains or drain funnels adjacent to equipment. Furnish drains from all pump bases to floor drains. C. Water Connections: Provide piping and fittings connecting to the domestic water system, such as fill lines, makeup water lines, etc., of Type K or L copper tubing with solder joint type wrought copper or wrought bronze fittings. Copper piping shall be connected to equipment and steel piping and insulated unions to prevent electrolysis. 2.2 GENERAL SERVICE VALVES: Comply with Section “Valves”. A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 23 General Mechanical Materials and Methods section “Valves”, in accordance with the following listing. 1. Sectional Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 2 ½ and Larger: Butterfly valves. 2. Shutoff Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 2 ½ and Larger: Butterfly valves. 3. Drain Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Ball valves. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: See Section “Valves”. 2.4 CIRCUIT BALANCE VALVES: A. Circuit balance valves for flow balance complying with Section “Valves”. 2.5 VENT VALVES: A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually. Use ball valve. B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, ½" NPS inlet and outlet connections. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering vent valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 3 3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 4. Spirax Sarco. 5. Amtrol. 2.6 WATER RELIEF VALVES: A. Heat Recovery Water System Relief: 1. Iron or bronze body, ASME, pressure setting as required. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide relief valves of one of the following: a. Bell & Gossett 3301 or 790 b. Watts. c. Taco 2.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: A. Heat recovery water service, brass body, removable strainer, adjustable setting, 125 psi maximum pressure rating. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and required inlet and outlet pressures. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure reducing valves of one of the following: 1. Bell & Gossett “7" 2. Watts. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials and products are to be installed. 3.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Arrange system in a neat, orderly and functional manner. Maintain access around all equipment. Provide sleeves for all structural penetrations. B. Plan ahead for seismic restraint and vibration isolation. C. Verify adequate ventilation for heat producing equipment. Avoid all possible freezing conditions. D. Air Vents and Line Drains: Provide air vents at all high points of piping systems with vent line extended to drain. Provide drain valves at all equipment and at low points in the system, extend drain lines to floor drain or floor sink. E. Provide pressure gauges and thermometers and pressure/temperature plugs as indicated on the flow diagrams, piping plans and equipment details. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING: A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings.” B. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush. C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 4 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALITES: A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 23 “Hydronic Piping and Specialties.” 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 23 “Mechanical Supporting Devices.” 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: A. Install valves in accordance with Division 23 “Valves.” B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Hydronic Terminal Outlet Valves: Install on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. E. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system. F. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION COMPENSATION PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide for expansion and contraction of all piping systems with anchors, guides, loops, expansion joints, grooved joints, etc. Provide one expansion loop for every 100 feet of pipe or fraction thereof. 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. General: Connect hydronic piping systems to mechanical equipment as indicated and comply with equipment manufacturer’s instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal shut-off valve and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on element in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Locate valves and balancing valves behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic temperature control valve unions on supply line. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES: A. Balance Valves: At locations shown on drawings. B. Vent Valves: 1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Automatic Vent Valves: Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 5 3.10 TESTS: A. Isolate sections of piping and equipment and pressure test to 175 psi or 1-1/2 times the maximum potential pressure of the system, but not to exceed the test pressure rating of a system component. 1. Conduct an air pressure test, using a soap solution to check for leaks. Establish the pressure, close off the pressure source and let stand for 24 hours. Given constant temperature, there should be no drop in pressure. 2. After the air test, fill the system with water, raise to test pressure and inspect for leaks. Repair all leaks. Repeat tests. Report and certify all tests. B. Test other system components as needed to verify proper assembly and installation. C. Participate in overall system test and balance work. END OF SECTION 232113 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT 232500 - 1 SECTION 232500 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Types of chemical treatment specified in this section include the following: 1. Cleaning and Treatment. 2. Filling of Heating Water System. 3. Domestic Water System Disinfection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING, HEATING WATER AND CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS: A. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed to fill, vent and drain system. 1. Use a treatment schedule similar to the following, but to be verified compatible with system materials. 2. Fill system with clean water for all cleaning, circulate, drain system, clean strainers. 3. Fill, introduce 3 lbs per 1,000 gallon of crystalline trisodium phosphate plus 0.025% wetting agent (TIDE) or other suitable degreaser, take the water to operating temperature, circulation for minimum of 5 hours, drain, flush. 4. Fill, clean and flush and sterilize where appropriate, all water piping systems with clean water and drain these systems before they are placed in operation. Flushing shall consist of not less than six (6) short, intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for cleanliness. Blow out all other piping systems with compressed air nitrogen to remove materials that may have been left or deposited in the piping system during its erection. 5. Fill heating water system with water, ready for final treatment. 6. For building heating water system fill, introduce oxygen inhibitor such as sodium borate-nitrite with phenopthalien, circulate. 7. For building heating water system maintain inhibitor for entire first year, replace if lost. 8. For building heating water system for one year, water treatment company to supply chemicals, and appropriate on-site service. 3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING SYSTEMS: A. All temporary piping systems shall be cleaned and filled as described in paragraph 3.1 prior to putting into service. 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM: Refer to Division - 23 “Water Distribution Piping and Equipment” for cleaning and disinfection. END OF SECTION 232500 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 1 SECTION 233100 - DUCTWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following: 1. Round 2. Rectangular 3. Oval 4. Spiral 5. Stainless Steel Laboratory Exhaust Ductwork 6. Factory C. Exterior Insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division 23 sections, and is included as work of this section. D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section. E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for chemical exhaust fans and not work of this section. F. Refer to other Division 23 sections for mechanical controls; not work of this section. G. Refer to other Division 23 sections for motorized dampers. H. Refer to other Division 23 sections for air control boxes; not work of this section. I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for grilles and diffusers; not work of this section. J. Refer to other Division 23 sections for system commissioning, testing and balancing; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. 1. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for metal ductwork materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate plenums in accordance with AMCA Standards. 3. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 “Duct Construction”, for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems” and NFPA 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems”. 5. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work. B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, plenums, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts, fittings and plenums. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork and plenums inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 3 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 - DUCTWORK - GENERAL: A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by SMACNA “Duct Construction Manuals” for the appropriate pressure class, and with the ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 edition, Chaper 1, Duct Construction. B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; mill phospatized for exposed locations. C. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, an other imperfections including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be laid out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and uniform, points shall be true, seams shall show continuity. D. Stainless Steel Assemblies: Fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel sheet complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished No. 4 satin finish for all hoods and duct exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and installation. 2.2 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION: A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15° change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45° lateral and 45° elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90° branches are indicated, provide 45° takeoff or conical type tees. B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers at 30° for contracting tapers and 20° for expanding tapers. C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Division 23 section “Duct Accessories” for accessory requirements. D. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. E. Offset, transition, adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of conditions, route around conflicting piping, lights, etc. as required at all no added cost to the owner. 2.3 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS: A. For all VAV systems, which include but are not limited to: 1. From fan discharge to air terminal unit: medium pressure ductwork, 10" w.g. 2. Rectangular supply air ductwork from air terminal unit, rectangular and round ductwork: Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Low pressure round The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 4 ductwork exposed to view spiral backseam, 3"w.g. 3. Branch round supply air ductwork runout from rectangular ductwork to diffuser: Low pressure round ductwork, 1" w.g. 4. Outside air ductwork and plenums, 10" w.g. 5. Relief air plenums, 3" w.g. B. Low pressure exhaust ductwork and ventilation systems, which include but are not necessarily limited to exhaust fan systems and ventilation systems. 1. Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e., 20 to 18) for all sizes. 2.4 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK: (1" SMACNA Pressure Class) A. Round type ductwork for use on low velocity supply systems (1200 fpm maximum), low pressure (0.75" maximum duct pressure), shall be fabricated on 26 gauge galvanized steel sheets with snap-lock longitudinal seams and crimped and beaded joins at a minimum. B. All end joints shall have at least three screw fasteners and shall be sealed airtight. Transverse and longitudinal seams shall be sealed with water based duct sealant Hardcast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate PROseal, Design Polymerics 1010, or equivelant. Elbows and fittings shall provide smooth air flow patterns and have a neat appearance. C. Use factory fabricated elbows of the multi-sectional adjustable type. 2.5 LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK: (3" SMACNA Pressure Class) A. Rectangular ductwork for use on supply systems up to 2" maximum duct static pressure and 2000 fpm maximum duct velocity shall be constructed of galvanized steel using construction for nominal 3" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse joints with water based duct sealer Hardcast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate PROseal, Design Polymerics 1010, or equivelant. B. Use radius elbows or turning vanes that meet SMACNA standards. Use a true 1-1/2 time 45° tapping takeoffs with downstream balance damper. C. Duct dimensions are inside clear. Increase for acoustical lining. D. For rectangular exhaust ducts, increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e. 20 to 18) for all sizes. Seal all joints. 2.6 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK: (10" SMACNA Pressure Class) A. General: At Installer’s option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and fittings. B. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed. Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture 3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam 15" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam 27" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam 37" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal seam The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 5 duct. C. Round Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous welds along seams. Mitered elbows shall be of at least 5 piece construction with R/D ratio of 1.5. All branch takeoffs shall be a true 45° takeoff having an overall throat width at the main duct connection of 1-1/2 times the sizes of the branch duct. Diameter Minimum Gauge 3" to 36" 20 38" to 50" 18 D. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam or longitudinal seam construction, in minimum gauges listed. Maximum Width Minimum Gauge Spiral Longitudinal Under 25" 24 22 25" to 48" 22 20 49" to 70" 20 18 Stiffener Inserts 4'- 0" on Center E. Flat-Oval Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous weld along seams. Maximum Width Minimum Gauge Under 37" 20 37" to 50" 18 Over 50" 16 F. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous weld along seams of outer shell. Construct fittings to close tolerance with ductwork. Nominal Duct Outer Shell Inner Liner Diameter 3"to 34" 20 gauge 20 gauge 36" to 48" 18 gauge 20 gauge Over 48" 16 gauge 20 gauge G. Duct sections and fittings shall be held in place at joints with sheet metal screws 6" on centers. Duct shall be sealed with either water based duct sealant rated for 10" class duct or with a solvent based sealant. Approved water based products are Hardcast Iron Grip 321, Design Polymerics 1030, or equivalent. Approved solvent based products are Ductmate SOLVseal, Design Polymerics 1090 or equivalent. Mastics are not allowed. H. Oval ductwork shall be installed where called for on the plans and where required to conform to tight space requirements encountered during construction. The contractor shall furnish transition pieces as required. Oval ductwork shall have equivalent capacity to the round duct. At the Contractor’s option odd inch diameter round ducts may be increased in size to the next larger even inch providing space considerations are accommodated and all related conditions are resolved by the contractor. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 6 2.7 FACTORY DUCT: A. Extent of Work: Provide factory duct at connections to air terminal units, at runout to grilles and diffusers, at points of round to round flexible connections (see also “Flexible Connections”) and at other locations indicated or required. B. Prohibited Material: Do not use single wire helix ducting with vinyl or plastic liner of any type. C. Factory Duct Non-corrosive Environments: Woven fiberglass fabric impregnated with vinyl or neoprene clamped in a continual helix of aluminum or cold rolled steel. U.L. listed for Class 1 duct, compliant with NFPA 90A an 90B, pressure rated to 12" w.g., equivalent to: D. Non-insulated: Wiremold 57; Flexmaster Type N145 E. Insulated: Flexmaster Type 4; Thermaflex M-KC F. Installation: Follow manufacturers instructions. Use stainless steel or nylon band clamping rings. In general, do not use lengths in excess of 3 feet. Make bends only in long radius format, no one flex run shall exceed a total of more than 90° of bend from sheet metal duct connection point to termination point. If duct has to be supported to avoid droops and kinks the duct shall be supported with 12" long saddle at a minimum. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requrements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Runout Fittings: Runout fittings shall be used to make round to rectangular duct connections. Use 45° “HETO” takeoff with increased area of 1.5 time the area of the round with square to round fittings. Provide with locking quadrant dampers where balance is involved. Provide with insulation guard where insulated duct is involved. C. Duct Sealing Compound: Duct sealing compound shall be either water based products Hardcast Iron Grip 321, Design Polymerics 1030, or equivalent for 6" and greater class ductwork and Hardcast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate PROseal, Design Polymerics 1010, or equivelant for 1" to 4" class ductwork . Or solvent based products Ductmate SOLVseal, Design Polymerics 1090 or equivalent. Mastics are not allowed. These materials shall be used in making up duct joints or in water proofing, caulking plenums, etc. D. Acoustical Lining: Acoustical lining in ducts shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 pound destiny, coated, flexible glass fiber type, set in adhesive and impaled on weld studs spaced not more than 12" on centers and secured with lock washers. Airstream surface faced with black coated matte. Acoustical lining shall completely line the ducts. Lining shall have a fire and smoke hazard rating not exceeding 20-50-50. Owens-Corning, Johnson- Manville, Certainteed. E. All joints, edges and/or surface breaks in the coating of the acoustical lining shall be pointed up to a smooth surface with adhesive. F. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 “Specifications for Adhesives and Duct Thermal Insulation”. G. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Contsruction Standards, Article S2.11. H. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 7 2.9 LABORATORY EXHAUST SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Extent of Work: Install complete laboratory exhaust system beginning at point of exhaust and including exposed duct, concealed duct, volume control devices and controls, exhaust fans, and accessory materials and devices. B. Exposed Ductwork: For drops to equipment or points of exhaust, fabricate of type 304 or 316 stainless steel with No. 4 finish with welded joints. Protect polished surface through construction period. Fabricate and install duct airtight with welded or sealed joints (use sealant which is impervious to a corrosive environment). Fabricate ducts of material weight and joint configurations defined by SMACNA for a -2.0" pressure class. C. Concealed Ductwork: Fabricate of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel with No. 1 mil finish with welded joints. Ducts may be rectangular, round or spiral wound as indicated and as appropriate for SMACNA -3.0" pressure class. D. Flexible Connections: Use factory assembled materials of all corrosion resistant components, eg. vent fabrics “Ventfab” with “Ventel” (teflon coated) fabric, stainless steel metal edge. E. Exhaust Fans: Whether in-line, roof curb mounted, centrifugal or utility vent set type, of general character specified for such equipment, but with corrosion resistant air side surfaces, shafts seals, motor out of air stream, vibration isolated, seismically restrained, fitted for duty. Corrosion resistance may be established by construction of aluminum or steel with an Eisenheiss coating or by construction of Type 304 stainless steel. F. Installation: Complete, airtight, sleeved and sealed at wall penetrations. Strip protective coating from finished stainless steel surfaces. Participate in test and balance work. 2.10 FUME EXHAUST STACKS: A. Extent of Work: Extend vertical discharges from fume exhaust fans in configurations and heights detailed. B. Stack Construction: 1. Stainless steel 16 gauge or heavier. All welded joints and seams, flanged ends. Follow “SMACNA Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction Manual”. Assume 12 foot stack height above roof and 100 mph wind loading. Brace stack to fan and/or structure. Polish out weld discoloration. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which material ductwork and plenum are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 8 performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project at necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to ½" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain clearances above of and in front of electrical panels. E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1- 1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Section “Firestopping”. F. Ducts At Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry opening and along edges of all plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" galvanized angle flashing which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Round high velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings. Close openings between duct and structure. G. Beading and Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be beaded or cross broken on the four sides of each panel. As per SMACNA standard 2.1.1.6 from the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Manual beading and cross breaking are not substitutes for duct reinforcement. Ducts that are 19" wide or less, or duct that is over 3" class, or duct that is constructed of 20 gauge or greater do not require beading and cross breaking. Otherwise, beading or cross breaking shall be used. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as duct panels of straight The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 9 sections of ducts shall be beaded or cross broken. Beading and cross breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles; the bead in the panel or center of cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid. H. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. I. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation. Cap open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Fans shall only be run with filters in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER: A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. As indicated on the drawings, supply, return and exhaust air ductwork shall be lined with acoustical insulation. In all cases outside air ductwork shall be lined with 2" thick 1-1/2 lb. density acoustical lining unless indicated differently on drawings, ie. requiring Type 2 plenum. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FELXIBLE DUCTS: A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 1'-10" extended length. No elbows allowed. B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. 3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to 18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers. Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not more than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy supporting angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two sides of the duct. B. Construct hangers for rectangular ductwork from galvanized iron 1" x 1/16". Hangers shall extend down the sides of rectangular ducts the full depth of the duct and shall be bent underneath the duct 2". Hangers shall be secured to the duct using sheet metal screws of appropriate sizes on 6" centers, but not less than two screws in the side and one on the bottom of each hanger and one on eh bottom side of the 2" bent under the duct. C. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width construct hangers from galvanized iron 1- 1/2" x 1/16". Hangers shall be installed and secured to duct as described in Paragraph B. D. Contractor shall follow and comply with all SMACNA standards for duct hangers and supports in the HVAC Duct Construction Manual. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 10 3.6 SUPPORTING DAMPERS: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or shall be supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine. 3.7 CONNECTIONS: Connections of high velocity supply and exhaust ducts, fittings, and high velocity mixing boxes shall be made airtight by coating joints with either water based products Hardcast Iron Grip 321, Design Polymerics 1030, or equivalent for 6" and greater class ductwork and Hardcast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate PROseal, Design Polymerics 1010, or equivelant for 1" to 4" class ductwork . Or solvent based products Ductmate SOLVseal, Design Polymerics 1090 or equivalent. Mastics are not allowed. 3.8 WELDED JOINTS: Welded ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" steel bar behind each weld to allow laying of a neat and continuous bead. 3.9 AESTHETIC LAYOUTS: Contractor shall locate all diffusers, grilles and other exposed items in such a manner as to fit symmetrically in any grid system or other aesthetic architectural or lighting pattern. Refer to reflected ceiling plans and electrical lighting layouts for additional information. Provide duct offsets or extensions as required to make a proper installation. Close or cap all duct ends. Use auxiliary blower with air flow meter to establish a duct pressure equivalent to the duct pressure class. Inspect all joints in duct system and seal all identifiable leaks. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Air leaks shall be sealed by with additional sealant to reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed the allowable amount. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class 3 for round/oval, 6 for rectangular. 3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION: A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: Before the ceilings are installed, with filters in place, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK 233100 - 11 C. Balancing: 1. Refer to Division 23 section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. However, the Sheet Metal Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. 2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions. END OF SECTION 233100 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 1. Dampers. a. Control Dampers and Isolation Dampers. b. Low pressure manual dampers. c. Electronic remote manual balance dampers. 2. Turning vanes. 3. Duct hardware. 4. Duct access doors. C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance data including parts list for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 “Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers”. 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A “Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL AND ISOLATION DAMPERS: A. Control and isolation dampers are furnished by this Section and installed by this Section. Dampers shall be supported, plenum openings shall be reinforced and the entire assembly shall be sturdy and operate smoothly. Install dampes to direct outside and return air into each other for mixing. Control dampers for relief air, return air, ventilation air, exhaust air, outside air, and supply air. Isolation dampers shall be installed to isolate supply air from one fan to the other by manual actuation. Low leakage type with spring loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or neoprene fabric edge seals, bronze or Teflon bearings, reinforced extruded aluminum airfoil blades, aluminum frame. Action as indicated on drawings. Air leakage not to exceed 5 CFM per square foot at 4" upstream static pressure. 1. Ruskin CD-50 2. Greenheck VCD-43. 2.2 HAND DAMPERS: A. Install hand operated volume and splitter dampers at locations and sizes shown. Volume dampers shall be controlled by heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Where ducts are insulated, the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be mounted on the outside of the insulation. Where volume dampers are installed in ducts over 12" deep, the dampers shall be at least 1-1/2 times as long as the narrowest adjacent split, except where otherwise detailed. Damper adjustment, accessible at fact of finishing ceiling, or equal units by Young Regulator. Butterfly dampers may be constructed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. All multi-blade hand dampers shall be the product of one of the manufacturers listed in the Contract Documents. All operator fittings shall be heavy duty commercial grade. B. Control dampers for balance only where tight shutoff is not critical are to be furnished and installed by this Section. 6" galvanized blade, poly foam blade seals, flexible metal jamb. Parallel blade operation. 1. Ruskin MD-35 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 2. Greenheck 2.3 REMOTE DAMPERS: A. General: Remote dampers shall be used in location where hand dampers with hand actuated quadrants can not be accessed. These spaces are typically in areas with gypsum board ceilings or other ceiling types where duct mounted dampers and their hand actuated quadrants cannot be accessed. B. Electronic Balancing Damper shall be a 12V DC actuator motor with connectivity and damper position indicators. Cabling shall be plenum rated with RJ-12 female ends to be mounted in EBD-WALL termination ports available in 1, 2, 4, 6, and 12 ports mounted in UL listed non metallic gang box. Cables shall be provided with dampers with actuator connection DELPHI that plug directly into the EBD motors, both cable ends, the RH-12 and the DELPHI shall be pre-wired by manufacturer and are available in 10, 25, 50, 75, and 100 foot lengths, customs lengths shall also be available up to 1,000 feet. If cable extensions are used then the shall be EBDC-EXT extensions provided by Young Regulator. Contractor shall provide one balance positioner to the balance contractor when the project is complete, the positioner shall be model EBDP woth blade position indicator that is operator on a single 9 V battery included with the positioner. 1. Round duct remote Electronic Balancing Dampers shall be provided with round duct sleeves with damper, and actuator mounted ready for cable connection. Round duct shall be 8" in length a construction for 4" to 9" ducts shall be of 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal and 10" to 16" shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Damper blade shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with ½" plated steel shaft and oil impregnated bronze bushings. Actuator shall be 12 volt DC motor rated for grater that 0.5 watts at greater than 20 mA. Actuator shall provide 16 lbs-in. maximum with a maximum of 12 second 90E rotation, the indicator shall show where the damper is within the 90Erotation of the actuator. a. Young Regulator EBD 2. High Efficiency Take Off Electronic Balancing Damper shall be provided with round duct section for damper to be mounted and connected to the high efficiency takeoff both constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Take off shall be provided with a 1" wide flange with corner clips and gaskets with double sided adhesive. High Efficiency Take Off Electronic Balancing Damper shall be available in 6", 8", 10" and 12" diameter take offs. Damper blade shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with ½" diameter steel shaft and nylon bushings. Actuator shall be 12 volt DC motor rated for grater that 0.5 watts at greater than 20 mA. Actuator shall provide 16 lbs-in. maximum with a maximum of 12 second 90E rotation, the indicator shall show where the damper is within the 90Erotation of the actuator. a. Young Regulator EBD5050 b. Specified Controls 3. Rectangular duct remote Electronic Balancing Dampers shall be provided with opposed blade damper with 5" wide by damper height mounting plate, and actuator mounted to mounting plate ready for cable connection. Damper shall be constructed of 0.050 extruded aluminum frame with reinforcing channels with 0.050 extruded aluminum damper blades with reinforcing channels. Damper The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 shall be provided actuator connected to damper linkages such that the damper is ready for installation from factory. Actuator shall be 12 volt DC motor rated for grater that 0.5 watts at greater than 20 mA. Actuator shall provide 16 lbs-in. maximum with a maximum of 12 second 90E rotation, the indicator shall show where the damper is within the 90Erotation of the actuator. a. Young Regulator EBDR b. Specified Controls 2.4 TURNING VANES: Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single blade. Turning vane spacing shall be per SMACNA. Each blade shall be tack welded or crimped to the carrier frame to prevent rattling. 2.5 DUCT HARDWARE: A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, cover for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided and installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearings plates for externally insulated ductwork. (Bare duct - Ventlok 620, 635; Insulated duct - Ventlok 627, 628, 637, 638, 629.) 3. As an alternate remote battery operated balancing damper motor and control can be used in place of locking quadrants and other devices listed above. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co. 3. Ruskin 2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: Door shall be 2" narrower than the duct width by 24" up to a maximum of 24" by 24". Duct access doors shall be furnished for all fire damper links, manual controllers and adjustable balancing devices. Duct access doors for all ductwork (except low pressure ductwork) shall be: Bolted access door, oval shaped constructed of an outer door connected to an inner plate by spring loaded carriage bolts with wing handles. Inner plate to have cellular sponge gasket for leak free operation up to 20"wg. The door shall have permanently bonded polyester insulation. 2.7 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS: Wall and ceiling doors at fire dampers and smoke dampers shall be the same as specified in Section 23 00 00. Doors shall be sized for easy access to fire links and not less than 24" x 24" where possible. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install hand operated volume dampers at locations and sizes shown. Volume dampers shall be controlled by heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Where ducts are insulated, the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be mounted on the outside of the insulation. Butterfly dampers may be constructed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. All multi-blade hand dampers shall be the product of one of the manufacturers listed in the Contract Documents. All operator fittings shall be heavy duty commercial grade. C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for a person to enter. E. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY WORK A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action. 1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 section “Mechanical Identification”. 2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”. 3. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer’s touch-up paint. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK: A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt. END OF SECTION 233300. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616 - 1 SECTION 233616 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Full measure of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and scheduled and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air terminals specified in this section include the following: 1. Air Control Valves a. Single Duct VAV Cooling Only b. Single Duct VAV Cooling with HW Heating C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for external insulation of air terminals; not work of this section. D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting and balancing of air terminals; not work of this section. E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for temperature controls for air terminals; not work of this section. F. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer’s Qualifications: Engage only firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. 1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616 - 2 B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air terminals with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal; including “trouble-shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 230593. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including performance data for each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size and accessories furnished; and installation and start-up instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit latter-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance with ARI 880 “Industry Standard for Air Terminals” and bear ARI certification seal. 2. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal insulations complying with NFPA 90A “Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”. 3. Uniform Building Code/Uniform Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes. B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616 - 3 A. Under the Base Bid which requests ad Direct Digital Control System, a VAV box controller is required which can provide a non-pneumatic, pressure independent, controls sequence. 1. Box capacity shall be equivalent to that scheduled. 2. Fit boxes with volume and temperature sensors and DDC controls, see Division 23 Controls. B. Terminals shall be certified under the ARI Standard 880 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. Noncertified terminals may be submitted after testing at an independent testing laboratory under conditions selected by the engineering consultant in full compliance with ARI Standard 880. These tests must be witnessed by the engineering consultant with all costs to be borne by the terminal manufacturer. Testing does not ensure acceptance. C. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with ½-inch dual density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. All exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the airstream. The discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction for attachment to metal ductwork. The casing shall be constructed to hold leakage to the maximum values shown in the Casing Leakage table. D. The damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin® self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent over stroking and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage to the maximum values shown in the Damper Leakage table. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the following: 1. Kruger 2. Price 3. Titus 2.3 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING ONLY (VAV) A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Kruger 2. Price 3. Titus B. Controls: Reference Sections 255100, and 259500. C. Construction: Factory fabricate VAV damper and heating coil into a single cabinet, except when coil access door is required, see drawings. Cabinet shall be of 22 gauge or The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616 - 4 heavier galvanized steel internally lined with a 1/2" thick acoustical dual density insulative lining complying with UL181 and NFPA 90A. All exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the airstream. The discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction for attachment to metal ductwork. VAV damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin® self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage of air-tight, quarter turn design. D. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminal as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule. Terminals shall be certified under the ARI Standard 880 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. Vendor/Contractor to verify count and arrangement. 2.4 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING WITH HW RE-HEATING (VAVR) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Price 3. Krueger B. Controls: Reference Sections 255100, and 259500. C. Construction: Factory fabricate VAV damper and heating coil into a single cabinet, except when coil access door is required, see drawings. Cabinet shall be of 22 gauge or heavier galvanized steel internally lined with a 1/2" thick acoustical dual density insulative lining complying with UL181 and NFPA 90A. All exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the airstream. The discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction for attachment to metal ductwork. VAV damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin® self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage of air-tight, quarter turn design. D. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminal as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule. Terminals shall be certified under the ARI Standard 880 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. Vendor/Contractor to verify count and arrangement. E. Heating Coils: Capacity and size as scheduled. Coils minimum 1 row, 8 FPI, with 2 row, 8 FPI, provided where capacity dictates. 1. Casings: Construct of 20 gauge continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into channels to minimize air bypass. 2. Headers: Seamless type K or L copper tube headers and return bends, brazed The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616 - 5 connections. 3. Fins: Corrugated plate sheet aluminum, 0.01" sheet thickness minimum. 4. Testing: Air tested under water to 300 psig. 5. Tubes: a. 1 Row Coils: Copper tube ½" diameter, 0.016" tube and bend wall thickness, expand tube into fins b. 2 Row Coils: Copper tube, 5/8" diameter, 0.016" tube and bend wall thickness, expand tube into fins. 6. The successful supplier shall include as part of the submittal, computer generated capacity data for each coil. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS A. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 23 ductwork sections. B. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. C. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. Protect electrical clearances. Protect access to controls. D. Seismic Restraint: Provide 3-dimensional restraint for all suspended boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance. B. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals are leak-tight. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturers touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 233616 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 1 SECTION 233713 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. Ceiling air diffusers and grilles 2. Wall registers and grilles C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for louvers, not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer’s Qualifications: Engage only a firm that has 3 years experience in the successful installation of metal ductwork systems similar in size and scope to this project. 1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage only a firm that have been contracted regularly for the manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 2 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish and mounting details. 2. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. 3. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. C. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished. D. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Codes and Standards: 1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 “Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters”. 2. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 “Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets”. 4. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 “Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets”. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Adjust all grilles and diffusers to fit neatly in the room ceiling pattern. Set final locations per architectural reflected ceiling plans. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 3 C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. D. Fire Dampers: Install the diffusers, registers and grilles as indicated on drawings or required by code. E. Grilles and Diffusers: 1. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (S-1): Titus Series TDC, square face, round neck, four- way, three-way, two-way, and one-way deflections as required on drawings, anti- smudge design, removable inner core, all steel construction, provide with surface mounted beveled drop face border type 6, color shall be #26 white, or selected by Architect, baked enamel finish. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991. 2. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (S-2): Titus Series TDC, square face, round neck, four- way, three-way, two-way, and one-way deflections as required on drawings, anti- smudge design, removable inner core, all steel construction, provide with Lay-in face border type 3, color shall be #26 white, or selected by Architect, baked enamel finish. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991. 3. Ceiling Linear Slot Supply Diffuser (S-3): Titus Model: ML-38, 3/4" Slot Supply Modulinear diffusers shall be TITUS model ML (supply) with ¾-inch slot spacing of the sizes shown on the plans and outlet schedule. Slots shall be provided with Border Type 2A for concealed mounting and slot shall be provided with factory manufactured insulated Plenums MPI-38 sized as per drawing requirements, Blank- Offs shall be provided as required by drawings. Linear slot diffusers shall be available in standard one piece lengths up to 6 feet and 1 to 8 discharge slots. Diffuser lengths greater than 6 feet shall be furnished in multiple sections and will be joined together end-to-end with alignment pins to form a continuous slot appearance. All alignment components to be provided by the manufacturer. The frame and support bars shall be constructed of heavy gauge extruded aluminum. The pattern controller shall be an aerodynamically curved “ice-tong” shaped steel deflector capable of 180° pattern adjustment from the face of the diffuser and shall allow dampering if required. Maximum pattern controller length shall be 3 feet, for diffusers longer than 3 feet pattern controllers shall be furnished in multiple sections. The finish shall be #26 white on the face and #26 white on the pattern controllers. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 4 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. Heavy gauge extruded aluminum end borders, end caps and mitered corners shall be available to close off the ends of the diffusers. Plenums shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the linear slot diffusers. Optional diffuser curving to a 6-foot minimum radius with fixed deflection shall be available as required. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the linear slot diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991. 4. Ceiling Return Grille (R-1): Titus Series 25RL AeroBlade Series Model 25R ½-inch blade spacing for the sizes shown on the plans and schedule. Provide with border type 1 surface mount with fastener type C for concealed screw mounting. The fixed deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long dimension of the grille. Blades shall be accurately formed to a proven curvature that has been certified according to current industry standards in a certified laboratory. Blades shall have a minimum gauge of 20 with a fixed deflection angle of 30°. All steel construction with appropriate mounting frame, The grille finish shall be #26 white or selected by the owner. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille. The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991. 5. Low Sidewall Return Grille (R-2): Kees Pattern SE088 7/8" Seashell with 56% free area Architectural Stamped Grille. Provide grille with primer finish ready for field painting, no mounting holes to be provided the grilles shall be mounted by use of magnets and grille shall be of 1/8" thick steel construction. Provide grille with 1" wide border, and opening size to match size shown on drawings. Opening sizes shown on drawing are approximate opening sizes and grilles should be the closest size to those shown on the drawings with out being larger that those given on the drawing, i.e. if a grille is shown on the drawings to be 14" high, then the grille opening size provided shall be no large than 14", and if 14" is not available then is should be the closest size down from 14", the same applies for the opening width. Color and finish shall be selected by the Architect. 6. Low Sidewall Return Grille (R-3): Kees Pattern SE088 7/8" Seashell with 56% free area Architectural Stamped Grille. Provide grille with Satin Bronze finish and #8 x 1" flat head bronze screws and mounting holes. Grille shall be of 1/8" thick bronze construction. Provide grille with 1" wide border, and opening size to match size shown on drawings. Opening sizes shown on drawing are approximate opening sizes and grilles should be the closest size to those shown on the drawings with out being larger that those given on the drawing, i.e. if a grille is shown on the drawings to be 14" high, then the grille opening size provided shall be no large than 14", and if 14" is not available then is shall be the closest size down from 14", the same applies for the opening width. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 5 7. Low Sidewall Return Grille (R-4): Titus Model 1700 of the sizes shown on the plans and outlet schedule, provide with surface mounting border type 1 with concealed screws. The fixed deflection blades shall be available for horizontal appearance parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille. Outer borders shall be constructed of heavy extruded aluminum with a thickness of 0.040 to 0.050 inch. The 5/32-inch diameter screw holes shall not be located on the inside of the grille and shall be concealed inside the border and accessible by removing the core. The border width shall be 1-inch on all sides and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. The grille core shall be constructed of heavy extruded aluminum and shall be removable and reversible for obtaining a discharge deflection angle of 15° up, 15° down, 5° up or 5° down. Core shall be easily removable by pulling on the detachable operating lever to provide access to frame for mounting of grille. The grille finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315° F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound force applied. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille. The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991. F. Approved Manufacturers for S-1, S-2, S-3, R-1, and R-4: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grilles and diffusers of one of the following: 1. EH Price 2. Krueger 3. Titus G. Approved Manufacturers for R-2, and R-3: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grilles and diffusers of one of the following: 1. KEES Inc. (Decorative Grilles) H. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer’s current data. I. Sound Level: The diffuser or grille generated noise shall not exceed the following sound level curve at a point five feet away from the diffuser or grille. 1. Commons Area: NC 30-35 2. Office Area: NC 30-35 J. Types: Provide grilles and diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on grille and diffuser schedule and as specified herein. K. Volume Control Dampers: See Ductwork Accessories Sections 233300.2.2 and 233300.2.3 for all balance damper requirements. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233713 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function. B. Air Mixer: Install in field assembled type II plenum, see section 233100. Provide vertical and horizontal stiffeners, angles, etc. to create a rigid panel assembly. Install on continuous 6"x6" concrete curb. END OF SECTION 233713 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 1 SECTION 255100 - BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS (BMCS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections 1. Division 1 - General Requirements 2. Division 23 - Sections 230593 and 230594 related to Testing and Balancing, work to be performed by Payson Sheet Metal contracted with the controls contractor as per owner directive. 3. Division 23 - See mechanical work and equipment required for installation of BMCS including but not limited to: a. Dampers in ducts and at air handling units. b. Setting in place of control valves. (This section furnishes control valves as scheduled.) c. Thermal wells in piping. d. Water flow switches. e. Water pressure and differential pressure taps. 4. Division 26 - Electrical work for power sources for panels and control equipment, providing of motor starters and disconnect switches. 5. Section 259500 - Building Automation and Control Commissioning (BACC). B. Provide and install a complete and functional Central Automated Control and General Building Temperature and Systems Control system, Includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Building Management Control System (BMCS) including, but not limited to: a. The contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (IDC and IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring. b. The contractor shall be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local wide area network. c. Electric and electronic control devices and items described in the Contract Documents, and as incidental, but required of the system to effect a complete functional system. d. Microprocessor based remote control panels interfacing with sensors, actuators, and environmental delivery systems (Mechanical equipment). e. Personal Computer (PC) based Operators Work Station with associated building management, monitoring, and control software to fully operate the integrated BMCS. 2. The building is to be fitted with a Honeywell WEBs System incorporating AX Niagara Framework DDC system. a. All licenses, programming, .jar files and toolkits are to become property of the owner and be left on site. b. All products used in the project shall be configured and programmed The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 2 through Tridium Workbench/Programming Tool. c. The Honeywell WEBs-AX system shall utilize open license Niagara AX JACE controllers. d. The JACE controllers shall be provided with embedded programming tool. e. Provide to the owner the passwords for the station user name “ADMIN” and platform user name “Tridium”. 3. Installation: a. Shop fabricate and assemble all control panels. Mount and wire BMCS field device for DDC systems. Make a complete installation. Devices include, but are not limited to- (1). Direct Digital Control (DDC) of air and water temperature, static and differential pressure sensing and control, damper and valve actuation, variable volume box control, electrical relays, switches, transformers, monitor modules, command modules, and any and all other devices needed to make complete system. (2). Furnish and install power, conduit, wire, boxes, etc. required for complete installation of BMCS devices. Make terminations. Check all installation for wiring and termination integrity. 4. Program the system and develop descriptive graphics and installation as specified. Provide complete start-up, check out, testing and validation (commissioning) of building control and automation systems as described in Contract Documents. 5. Providing: a. All Control relate hardware and software, and installation of all, as listed and described in these documents, and as required to provide fully functional automation and control systems. b. Central microprocessor based operator control station, and remote terminal communication hardware and software with associated wiring and installation necessary to allow remote monitoring and control of the building’s mechanical systems, with a graphical and interactive interface of all controlled assemblies at the operator’s work station. c. Project specific design, furnishing of components and materials, and installation of building automation and control system(s), following the system outline as described in the Contract Documents, which includes drawings and specifications. 6. Provide/Furnish and install software required to make Building Management Control Systems (BMCS) function as intended. Make the software fully operational for the intended functions. 7. Provide control system related materials and installation related to Mechanical controls. C. System Providers 1. Approved Subcontractors: a. Cache Valley Electric - Salt Lake City b. Colt Controls, Steve Lewis Heath Engineering - Salt Lake City c. Harris Controls - Blackfoot Idaho d. Engineer prior approved (to bidding) Controls Firm 2. Controls Subcontractor - provide for overall responsibility for the control work The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 3 described herein, including material, labor, hardware, software, markups, overhead and profit, warranty, etc. including cost of system design, programming, software setup and installation, checkout, test and demonstration. 3. Installers/programmers shall have WEBs-AX certification and have at least three years of experience installing and programming WEBs-AX systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Facility Management and Control System (BMCS) as provided in this Division shall be based on the Honeywell WEBs System incorporating the AX Niagara Framework™. B. The Facility Management and Control System (BMCS) shall be comprised of Network Area Controller or Controllers (NAC) within the Building. The NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, if available and allowed by the Owner. Access to the system, remotely from a central site shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via high speed modem. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark/LonTalk (IDC) and/or BACnet (IBC) controllers and other open protocol systems/devices provided under Division 25. C. The entire Temperature Control System (TCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating via LonMark/LonTalk communication protocols to a Network Area Controller (NAC). Temperature Control System products shall be manufactured by Honeywell. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the components and devices for the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions for all controllers, valves, actuators, sensors, switches, routers, etc. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall also be included with the submittal package. The Contractor may use CAD copies of the Autocad contract drawings as a place to begin, but the final submittals are to be become product of the Contractor’s effort leading to a final system configuration. B. Submittal shall also include: 1. Software design data including: a. Data files of point function programming, entered set points and parameters, etc. This is to be a permanent file, available for update throughout life of the control system. b. Flow charts of implementation of operating sequences. c. List of software, copies of installation and user manuals d. Sequences of operation C. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all points to be connected to the TCS and BMCS. D. Submittal shall also include a copy of each of the graphics developed for the Graphic User Interface including a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked to one another for system navigation. The graphics are intended to be 80%-90% The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 4 complete at this stage with the only remaining changes to be based on review comments from the Engineer and/or Owner. E. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator workstations, control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. F. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of “as-built” drawings and application software on compact disk. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCAD™ compatible files. Eight copies of the “as-built” drawings shall be provided in addition to the documents on compact disk. All as built drawings shall be installed into the BMCS server in a dedicated directory. 1.4 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: BMCS Building Management and Control Systems DDC Direct Digital Controls GUI Graphical User Interface IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller IDC Interoperable Digital Controller LAN Local Area Network NAC Network Area Controller OOT Object Oriented Technology PICS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement PMI Power Measurement Interface POT Portable Operator’s Terminal TCS Temperature Control System WAN Wide Area Network WBI Web Browser Interface 1.5 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS A. All products of the TCS and BMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. CE 2. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “Signal Equipment” 3. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices 4. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 1.6 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT A. The Owner shall agree to the manufacturer’s standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such a license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer’s license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer’s rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 5 B. The Owner shall be named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the NAC, BMCS Server(s), and any related LAN/WAN/Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and all required Ids and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the Owner. The Owner shall determine which organizations to be named in the SI organization ID (“orgid”) of all software licenses. Owner shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless of supplier. C. Provide OPEN Jace controllers. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to ensure that the Work will be carried out in any orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor’s responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features. B. Temple Recommends: Once the building is dedicated only Temple Recommend holders will be allowed access to the building. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-installation Meeting: Attend a scheduled meeting with the Owner, Engineer and others of the construction team before installation of temperature control and automation system begins. Review proposed systems, identify areas requiring clarification. B. Requirements: 1. Applicable current NFPA Standards and Guides: a. Idaho Building Code, latest adoption b. Idaho State Energy Code c. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code 2. UL and ISO Listings: a. Complete BMCS components installation shall be in accordance with national and local electrical codes. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide complete warranty coverage of all materials furnished and all installation made by this subcontract for one year period following acceptance by the Owner. Provide corrective software modifications required during the project warranty period and service The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 6 periods and update user documentation and user and manufacturer archived software disks during the one year warranty period as specified in the General Conditions. 1.11 SCHEDULING A. Coordination 1. Coordinate planning and installation of equipment with parties specified to be involved in BMCS including but not limited to: a. Electrical Subcontractor b. Mechanical/Electrical Design Engineer and Consultants c. Mechanical Subcontractor d. Owner e. Owner’s Balancing Agency f. Representative from Control Subcontractor 2. Owner requires that testing, balancing and commissioning activities of Sections 230593, and 259500 be performed concurrently. 1.12 CLOSEOUT A. Manuals 1. A complete record of all developed screens and program input, including logic and formulas used in the relationships of one component to another. 2. Submit following manuals for use in operator training and ongoing references fro facility operators: a. Operator’s Manual (3 original copies) b. Third Party Software Manuals (2 copies, at least 1 being an original copy) c. Three manuals including revised “as-built” documents of materials listed under Shop Drawings and copies of warranties. Include complete wiring and piping interconnection diagrams showing panel and device power and sources. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The temperature Control System (TCS) and Facility Management Control System (BMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface software, printers, network devices, valves, dampers, sensors, and other devices as specified herein. All systems and software within BMCS shall be Year 2000 compliant and shall be supported by compliance documentation from the manufacturer. 1. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BMCS. 2.2. OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES A. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer” The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 7 communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable. B. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. 1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. 2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces. C. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135- 2001 BACnet, LonWorks technology, MODBUS, OPC, and other open proprietary communication protocols in one open, interoperable system. D. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI/ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide and XIF file and resource file for the device. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as specified. E. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (OBDC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. 2.3 NETWORKS A. Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and SOAP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs) and workstations. B. Local Area Network minimum physical and media access requirements: 1. Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 2. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 3. Minimum throughput; 100Mbps 2.4 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A. The contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) [JACE AX] as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 8 quantity of devices provided. Provide JACE AX controllers with add on I/O modules to provide auxiliary monitoring and control functions. Provide open JACE controllers. B. The Network Area Controllers (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Alarm monitoring and routing 2. Calendar functions 3. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data 4. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices 5. Scheduling 6. Time synchronization 7. Trending C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. Battery Backup 2. Flash memory for long term data backup (if battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 3. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. 4. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32°F to 122°F 5. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F 6. One Ethernet Port 10/100 Mbps 7. One LonWorks Interface Port - 78KB FTT-10A 8. One RS-232 Port 9. One RS-485 Port D. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. E. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: 1. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Recipient c. Time of day 2. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s). 3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on recipient of email message. 4. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer. 5. Screen message text F. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user. G. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user. H. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user. I. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 9 J. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user. K. Event Alarm Notification and actions 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgment requirements including, but not limited to: a. To alarm b. To fault c. Return to normal 2. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and/or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtim or even count values with appropriate password control. 3. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 4. Provide timed (scheduled) routing of alarms by class, object, group or node. 5. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network. 6. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage: routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. L. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): 1. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgment. 2. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.) 3. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 4. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgment. 5. Time and date. M. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide and ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it. N. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Internet/Intranet. It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous users. O. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. 2.5 DATA COLLECTION AND STORAGE A. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use. B. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser. C. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats: 1. Comma or tab separated values 2. HTML 3. Plain Text 4. XML D. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements. E. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum the following configurable properties: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 10 1. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 2. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based even or by a user-defined event or action. 3. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. 4. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 5. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. F. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum: 1. Archive on time of day 2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) 3. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores 4. Provide ability to clar logs once archived. G. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be acceptable. 2.6 AUDIT LOG A. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data: 1. Time and Date 2. Change or activity: i.e., Change set point, add or delete objects, commands, etc. 3. User ID 2.7 DATA BACKUP AND STORAGE A. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval. B. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported. C. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval. 2.8 INTEROPERABLE DIGITAL CONTROLLER (IDC) A. All IDC’s shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their LONMARK certification, if so certified. Controllers offering application selection only (non-programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the IDC shall be stored in The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 11 non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. B. Controls shall be Honeywell Excel 10, Open Jace AX (with add on I/O module for auxiliary control function) microprocessor control function based on Interoperable LonWorks Controllers shall bear the applicable LonMark™ interoperability logo on each product delivered. C. Division 25 contractor shall run the LonWorks network trunk to the nearest Network Area Controller (NAC). Coordinate locations of the NAC to ensure that maximum network wiring distances, as specified by the LonWorks wiring guidelines, are not exceeded. A maximum of 126 devices may occupy any one LonWorks trunk, and must be installed using the appropriate trunk termination device. All LonWorks and LonMark devices must be supplied using FTT-10A LonWorks communications transceivers. D. Division 25 contractor supplying the IDC’s shall provide documentation for each device, with the following information at a minimum: 1. Network configuration parameters (nci, nco); name and type 2. Network Variable Inputs (nvi’s); name and type 3. Network Variable Outputs (nvo’s); name and type E. HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark™ based devices where the application has a LonMark profile defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file for the device. Publicly available specifications for the Applications Programming Interface (API) must be provided for each LonWorks/LonMark controller defining the programming or setup of each device. Division 25 contractor shall provide all programming, documentation and programming tools necessary to set up and configure the supplied devices per the specified sequences of operation. F. The IDCs shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The IDC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal. G. It is the responsibility of the Division 25 contractor to ensure that the proper Network Variable Inputs and Outputs (nvi and nvo) are provided in each IDC, as required by the point charts. H. The Network Area Controller (NAC) will provide all scheduling, alarming, trending and network management for the LonMark/LonWork based devices. I. The supplier of any programmable IDC shall provide one copy of the manufacturer’s programming tool, with documentation, to the owner. 2.9 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE A. Alarm Console: 1. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator. 2. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supercede all other window on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 12 banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable. B. The GUI shall employ brower-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification. C. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format. D. Operating System: 1. The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows XP Professional. E. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions: 1. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. 2. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. 3. Graphic screens shall be developed by using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures. 4. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animations, color spectrum objects, logs graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens. 5. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported. 6. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. a. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. b. Schedule times will be adjusted using the graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. F. Security: Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a username and password in order to view, edit, add or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 13 G. System Configuration: At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: 1. Add/delete objects to the system 2. Create, delete or modify control strategies 3. Enable or disable control strategies 4. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer 5. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state 6. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically 7. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters H. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 2.10 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be accessible. B. The Web browser client shall support, at a minimum, the following functions: 1. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface. 2. Graphic screens on the Web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link. 3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. 4. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page. 5. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable. 6. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator. 7. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. 8. Users shall have the administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right- clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 14 b. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. i. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. ii. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. c. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information. d. View and acknowledge alarms e. View logs and charts C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. D. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the BMCS, shall not be acceptable. 2.11 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface displays shall not be acceptable. B. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator. C. Programming Methods: 1. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed. 2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted. 3. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user- defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 15 other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc. 4. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before its applied to the system. 5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication. 2.12 LonWorks NETWORK MANAGEMENT A. Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding. B. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide a complete set of integrated LonWorks network management tools for working with LonWorks networks. These tools shall manage a database for all LonWorks devices by type and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for identifying each device on the network. These tools shall also be capable of defining network data connections between LonWorks devices, known as “binding”. Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted. C. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices. D. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network managements database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted. E. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management databases. 2.13 OBJECT LIBRARIES A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks. B. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification. C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed. D. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and- The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 16 click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control. 2. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the users and shall be selectable to shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort. 3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals. 4. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events. 5. Start-Stop Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the buidling’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start/stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance. 6. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling, etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. E. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification. 1. Analog Input Object. Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits. 2. Analog Output Object. Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object. Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 17 for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition. 4. Binary Output Object. Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable. 5. Comparison Object. Allow a minimum of two analog object to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 6. Composite Object. Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large application. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container. 7. Custom Programming Objects. Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 8. Interlock Object. Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming therby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 9. Math Object. Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 10. PID Control Loop Object. Minimum requirement is to comply with BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional, integral and derivative control. 11. Temperature Override Object. Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 18 capability of overriding a binary output to an “on” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. F. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library. G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software: 1. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. Analog In b. Analog Out c. Analog Value d. Binary e. Binary In f. Binary Out g. Binary Value h. Calendar Export i. Device j. Multi-State In k. Multi-State Out l. Multi-State Value m. Schedule Export n. Trend Export 2. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum: a. Acknowledge Alarm b. Application Services c. BACnet Broadcasting Management Device (BBMD) function d. BACnet IP Annex J e. Confirmed COV notification f. Confirmed Event notification g. Ethernet h. Get Alarm Summary i. I-am j. I-have k. Media Types l. MSTP m. Read Property n. Read Property Multiple o. Routing p. Segmentation q. Segmented Request r. Segmented Response s. Subscribe COV The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 19 t. Unconfirmed COV notification u. Unconfirmed Event notification v. Who-has w. Who-is x. Write Property y. Write Property Multiple 3. For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration. 4. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number. 5. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide LonMark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer. 2.14 DDE DEVICE INTEGRATION A. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of these devices into the BMCS. Objects provided shall include, at a minimum: 1. DDE Generic AI Object 2. DDE Generic AO Object 3. DDE Generic BI Object 4. DDE Generic BO Object B. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), over the Ethernet Network. The Network Area Controller shall act as a DDE client to another software application that functions as a DDE server. 2.15 MODBUS SYSTEM INTEGRATION A. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the Modbus system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller. B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of the Modbus system data into the FPMS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum: 1. Read/Write Modbus AI Registers 2. Read/Write Modbus AO Registers 3. Read/Write Modbus BI Registers 4. Read/Write Modbus BO Registers C. The BMCS supplier shall provide a Modbus system communications driver. The equipment system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing Modbus shall provide documentation of the system’s Modbus interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 20 D. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data from Modbus RTU, Ascii, or TCP control system devices. The connection to the Modbus system shall be via an RS-232, RS485, or Ethernet IP as required by the device. 2.16 OPC SYSTEM INTEGRATION A. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the OPC system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller. B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of the OPC system data into the BAS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum. 1. Read/Write OPC AI Object 2. Read/Write OPC AO Object 3. Read/Write OPC BI Object 4. Read/Write OPC BO Object 5. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object 6. Read/Write OPC Date Time Output Object 7. Read/Write OPC String Input Object 8. Read/Write OPC String Output Object C. The BMCS supplier shall provide an OPC client communications driver. The equipment system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing OPC shall provide documentation of the system’s OPC server interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning. D. The Network Area Controller shall act as an OPC client and shall support the integration of device data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet IP as required by the device. The OPC client shall support third party OPC servers compatible with the Data Access 1.0 and 2.0 specifications. 2.17 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP) A. BMCS Head End Hardware: 1. Utilize existing in place. 2.18 ATC PANELS A. Complete panel assembly must be UL listed as custom control assembly. B. Minimum point counts shall be as indicated on Contract Documents with at least 25 percent spare points of each type in every case. C. Mount Network Area Controller (NAC) [JACE AX], JACE 2 AX with add on I/O modules, control devices, wire ways, and terminal strips in UL listed panels and provide wiring to terminal strips. D. Panel comonents (i.e. relays, transducers, wire, wiring duct terminals etc.) shall be UL recognized or listed. E. Panel enclosures shall be UL Listed NEMA 1 type with hinged, locking covers, ventilation openings with replaceable filter media. 1. Approved Manufacturer a. E. M. Wiegmann b. Hoffman The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 21 c. Rittal F. Panels shall be pre-assembled and fabricated in the shop with field terminals as shown or suggested on Mechanical “MI-xx” Drawings, adapted for final shop drawing layout, ready for installation. 2.19 ACCESSORIES A. General Materials: 1. Conduit: Run all wiring external to control panels in EMT conduit with wiring boxes to suit. Use no conduit smaller than 3/4". Last 12-18 inches may be in flexible conduit. Terminate all wiring inside panels or devices with solder or crimped type lug to screw type terminals. Follow practices of Division 26 and make the installation common in appearance and workmanship to the work of Division 26. 2. Wiring: To suit application. Any plenum exposed wiring to be plenum rated. B. Un-interruptible Power Supply (UPS) 1. Include a programming function to effect an orderly lay-up of each system involved in a loss of power and then effect a return to normal operation in an orderly manner equivalent to a morning startup. 2. Provide a UPS feature for the Graphical User Interface/Work Station, and for all DDC panels 01, 02, and 03. Size for 1 hour backup of all connected devices. a. Connect to a digital system power management switchboard. b 120 volt input/output 2.20 ADDITIONAL CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE A. Analog Input Sensors: MMCPR276-R2-mA Building Space Static/Return Air Static Sensor ONICON F-3100 inline Chilled Water Flow meter with transducer electromagnetic flow meter, suitable for use with glycol chilled water. +0.4% of reading accuracy. Painted carbon steel body, 304 SS flow tube, class 150 flange connection PTFE liner, 24 vac, integral display, isolated 4-20MA analog output. 0-400 gpm 6" pipe size. C7041J2007 Discharge, Mixed Air Temperature Sensor (144" Averaging) H7635B1004 Duct Humidity/Temperature Sensor & Cover The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 22 (mA) MMCPR276-R11mA Duct Static Transducers (mA) C7041C2003 Duct Temperature Sensor (18") 20K MMCPR274-R3-mA Filter Static Transducers (mA) VUL90DM3ADT-1 Return Air CO2 Sensor (mA) TR24, blank cover, and Space Temperature Sensor with E-bus jack TR22+/- set point Space Temperature Sensor with Setpoint adjustment and E-bus jack H7635C1002 System Outside Air Humidity/Temperature Sensor (mA) MMCPR283-R1-mA Water Differential Pressure Sensor MMCPR283-R2-mA Water Differential Pressure Sensor MMCPR283-**-mA Water Differential Pressure Sensor to measure water flow MMCPR264-R1-mA Water Pressure Sensor C7941D2001 Water Temperature Sensor 50001774-001 Water Temperature Sensor Well MMCVM-705 WPS manifold C7770A1006 Zone Discharge Air Temperature B. Analog Output Devices: VB2-XX-CV-SD 2-Way Ball Valve w/MS705A2008 Actuator (13VA) or provide Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendation, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each valve controlled). Provide valve actuator of equal or greater quality. VB3-XX-CV-SD 3-Way Ball Valve w/MS7505A2008 Actuator (13VA). Honeywell 3-way ball valves do not The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 23 have stainless steel trims. Use only Belimo equivalent. VGF211LSxx 2-Way Globe Valve. Provide Honeywell or Belimo equivalent. Size valve according to valve schedule. VGF31EMxx 3-Way Globe Valve. Provide Honeywell or Belimo equivalent. Size valve according to valve schedule. ML7421A1032 Font Valve Actuator - Non Spring Return (12VA) or provide Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendations, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each valve controlled). Provide valve actuator of equal or greater quality. ML7421A1032 Globe Valve Actuator - Non Spring Return (12VA) or provide Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendations, determine model number/qualities and size actuators for each valve controlled). Provide valve actuator of equal or greater quality. MN7220A2007 Modulating Damper Motor - Non Spring Return (6VA) - 175 in-lb or Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendation, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each damper controlled). Provide damper actuator of equal or greater quality. MS7520A2007 Modulating Damper Motor - Spring Return (16VA) - 175 in-lb or Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendation, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each damper controlled). Provide damper actuator of equal or greater quality. C. Digital Input Sensors: TDIAP5210030 Duct High/Low Limit Pressure Safety Switch DH100ACDCLP Duct Smoke Detector ST-3 Duct Smoke Detector Sampling Tube The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 24 HAWK904 Fan/Pump with VFD Run Status RIBU1C Field Relay for Bypass Input HAWK908 Large Fan/Pump Run Status (Constant Volume) HAWK 608 Small Fan/Pump Run Status (Constant Volume) D. Digital Output Devices: MN6120A1002 2 Position Non Spring Return Damper Actuator (6VA) - 175 in-lb or Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendation, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each damper controlled). Provide damper actuator of equal or greater quality. MS8120A1007 2 Position Spring Return Damper Actuator (40 VA) - 175 in-lb or Belimo equivalent. (Model number specified is only a family part number recommendation, determine model number/quantities and size actuators for each damper controlled). Provide damper actuator or equal or greater quality. RH2B-UL-24VAC Idec 24 VAC Relay (Panel Mounted DPDT) BND1000 Rail SH2B-05 Relay Socket (Panel Mounted) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate between trades and adapt to actual job site conditions. B. Install systems as detailed on drawings and in accordance with instructions received with temperature control system components. C. Make a complete installation of Building Automation and Temperature Control systems. D. Mount Damper actuators and actuator linkages external of airflow except where dampers are in relief air plenums. E. Obtain “pre-built” panels or provide panels equivalent to the pre-built following the outline of the contract drawing. F. Provide and Install all wiring, including low voltage cables in conduit. G. Provide E-Bus and LON Bus cable and other certified system compatible control equipment. 3.2 DATA CONTROL AND GRAPHICS SUMMARY The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 25 A. General: 1. List of hardware points for each DDC controller appears on Mechanical Drawings. Graphics showing these points, along with appropriate pseudo points (i.e. set points, etc.) shall be incorporated into operational graphics. 2. Provide programming for lighting graphics and schedules. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor/Engineer for exact requirements. 3. Provide software graphics and programming required to accomplish detailed sequence of operations. 3.3 POST INSTALLATION - SYSTEM SETUP, INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT A. General - All work is the responsibility of the Controls subcontractor. B. Controls Contractor shall provide- 1. Contractor to develop and maintain diskette copies of data file and application software for reload use in event of system crash or memory failure. Deliver one copy to Owner during training session, and archive one copy at an off-site software vault. Schedule, organize, conduct, when necessary, required meetings or teleconference to accomplish the work of this section as described in Contract Documents. 2. Key personnel as required to meet following on-site requirements- a. General project supervision of on-site control work i. Maintain regular contact with Divisions 22, 23, and 26 and General Contractor’s superintendent to ascertain ongoing project status. ii. Provide, at a minimum, on-site inspections at the following intervals: a). Pre-Construction Meeting b). Beginning of installation phase (initial Kick-off Meeting) c). Prior to dry wall phase (prior to control system rough-in being covered up). d). Participation in system check-out and commissioning. iii. Provide installation information whenever requested. 3. Participate with Test and Balance contractor to provide a complete and functional system. Provide material to make a full and complete report of work undertaken and final conditions obtained. 4. Perform demonstration requirements as described in Contract Documents. C. On-Site Supervision - provide: 1. Oversight supervision of the control hardware and wiring installation team. 2. Responsibility for the overall control system installation. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Completely check, calibrate, and test connected hardware and software to insure system performs in acordance with Contract Documents and sequences of operation submitted, prior to validation specified below. B. Start-up 1. Have qualified technician on-site to help Temple Engineering Staff during initial The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 26 operations. C. Training 1. Provide following training - a. Initial 6-hour session cover following topics - i. Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode. ii. Sign on - sign off. iii. Selection of displays and reports. iv. Sequence of Operation review. v. Use of dialog boxes and menus. b. Provide second 6-hour training session covering following topics - i. Complete use of Portable Operators Terminal functions. ii. Download and initialization of remote panels. iii. Modifying English text. iv. Modifying warning limits, alarm limits and start-stop times. v. Password modification. vi. Purge and/or dump historical data. vii. System initialization. viii. Trending and reporting. ix. Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors). c. Provide additional 2-hour supervisor training session and include the following: i. Complete use of portable operator terminal functions. ii. Operator assignment/modification. iii. Operator authority assignment/modification. iv. Password assignment/modification. v. Point disable/enable. vi. Terminal and data segregation/modification. vii. Use of spreadsheet package with system data. d. Operator training to include two additional 3-hour sessions for two Owner personnel- i. Add/Delete/Modify alarm messages. ii. Graphic creation. iii. Modification of control set points. iv. Review of initialization. v. Software review of Sequence of Operation. vi. System maintenance procedures. vii. Upload/download and off-line archiving of system software. viii. Use of diagnostics. D. Witnessed validation demonstration for Owner’s Engineer shall consist of: 1. Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm archiving and color banding. 2. Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs (6 loops minimum). 3. Demonstrate multitasking by showing graphic construction. 4. Demonstrate on-line user guide and help function and mail facility. 5. Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. 6. Demonstrate spreadsheet/curve plot software and its integration with database. 7. Display and demonstrate each data point to show parameter changing capability. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS 255100 - 27 8. Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode. 9. Running of each type of special report. 10. Step through penetration tree, display listed graphics, demonstrate dynamic update and direct access to graphics. END OF SECTION 255100 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING 259500 - 1 SECTION 259500 - BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING (BACC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General 1. Commissioning of temperature controls including required programming to provide the specified sequence of operation shall be provided by the Division 25 contractor. B. Related Sections 1. Section 255100 - Building Energy Management and Temperature Control Systems (BMCS). 2. Section 230593 - Duct Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 3. Section 230594 - Pipe Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 4. Division 23 - Installing of temperature control valves, thermal wells in pipes, and chiller flow switch and font water sensor as furnished by others. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RESPONSIBILITY A. Qualifications - Only qualified technicians, with valid temple recommends, shall provide on-site system check-out, warranty service, and training once temple dedication begins. B. The building HVAC control system is to be independent of the building fire detection and alarm system, except that the detection and alarm system provides fan system smoke detection and fan system shutdown and fire/smoke damper management. C. The building is to be fitted with a Honeywell WEBs System incorporating AX Niagra Framework DDC system. D. Control Commissioning shall be provided by the same subcontractor as the installing subcontractor. Installers/programmers must have WEBs-AX certification and have at least three years of experience installing and programming WEBs-AX systems. E. Approved subcontractors are: Harris Controls - Blackfoot, Idaho or Salt Lake City, Utah Cache Valley Electric - Salt Lake City Colt Controls, Steve Lewis Heath Engineering- Salt Lake City Engineer prior approved (to biding) Controls Firm 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Coordination 1. Coordinate planning and installation of equipment with parties specified to be involved in BACC including but not limited to - a. General Contractor b. Electrical Subcontractor The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING 259500 - 2 c. Mechanical Subcontractor d. Owner e. Architect and Consultants f. Owner's Balancing Agency 2. Owner requires that balancing and commissioning activities of the mechanical systems be performed concurrently. B. Certification of Equipment 1. Systems involved in commissioning of BACC must be operational. a. Contractor will submit to the Architect the following signed certification forms no later than five weeks prior to contract completion time as stipulated in Contract Documents. (copies included in Bidding Requirements) 1) Pre-Commissioning Certificate - Mechanical 2) Pre-Commissioning Certificate - Electrical b. After receipt of certificates, and at least five weeks prior to completion, Contractor will notify the Owner that the project is ready for commissioning and balancing and will forward copies of pre-commissioning certificates to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sequence of Operation: The following sequences are presented as an initial outline of what will be the eventual final control sequences. The contracted Controls Engineer is to meet early in construction with the design engineer to review the documents and to confirm that the sequences do indeed reflect the final installation configuration and present a coherent and comfort responsive and energy conserving type of operation for the system. The joint effort will also help the contracting team to understand the operating expectation of the system. There may be components in the project with missing sequences. Make the assumption that all system components require central supervision and control unless the control is obviously local. Clarify the sequence during the joint consultation. All set points are to be adjustable, access to adjustment based on level of authority delegated to individual operators. 3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Sequence of Operation The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING 259500 - 3 1. Variable Volume Cooling With Reheat a. Each room/space VAVR box with reheat coil shall be provided with a VAVR box inlet cross flow velocity sensor and outlet temperature sensor. b. Each room/space VAVR box with reheat coil shall be controlled by a DDC controller fed through the central control panel. This will allow for remote monitoring and remote changing of unit parameters. c. When the room/space temperature rises above the set point of the unit controller as sensed by the space temperature sensor, the VAVR box damper will modulate open from its occupied minimum airflow CFM setting toward the cooling maximum airflow set point and the heating coil valve will be closed. d. As the room/space temperature drops to set point, the VAVR box damper modulates down to its occupied minimum airflow CFM setting. This minimum shall be fully automatically adjustable and set as called for on the Drawings. e. When the room/space temperature drops below set point, the VAVR box damper shall modulate open from its occupied minimum setting to its heating maximum airflow CFM setting and the heating water valve shall modulate open. Upon meeting the room/space temperature setpoint the VAVR box damper shall return the minimum airflow setpoint and the heating water control valve shall modulate closed. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Services 1. Building Temperature Control System And Fire and Security Alarm System a. Provide system programming, check-out, commissioning, and training. b. Program and enter data files into system controllers. Approved parameters and settings are to be established in discussion between the Project Mechanical Design Engineer, Owners Headquarters Engineer and the HVAC Control Engineer. 2. The Fire and Security Alarm System which is provided by Division 26 detects smoke in the airflow of the HVAC systems, and shutdowns the HVAC fans and equipment on alarm, and of controls the combination fire/smoke dampers in the HVAC systems. 3. Division 25 provides and installs HVAC (Mechanical) Control Systems. Division 26 supports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Completely check, calibrate, and test connected hardware and software to insure system performs in accordance with Contract Documents and sequences of operation submitted. B. Demonstrate complete system operation for Owner's Engineer or Project Manager prior to Temple dedication. C. Training 1. Perform training at the same time as commissioning is done. Utilize specified manuals and record documentation. 2. Provide 16 hour training session for Temperature Control systems covering The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING 259500 - 4 following topics - a. Sequence of operation review b. Use of command module c. Operating time schedules d. Alarm messages e. Telephone Lines \ Modem connection pertaining to temperature control systems. f. Review modifying set points and schedules g. Questions and answers. D. Final Acceptance 1. Written acceptance sign off of system operation will then occur after commissioning and training are complete. Acceptance will be signed by Owner's Project Manager and Church Headquarters Engineer. 2. Checklist, provided by Owner, shall be initialed and signed by Owner's Project Manager at completion of training. a. Punch list items completed and BACC accepted. b. Checklist shall verify required training has been provided. c. Checklist shall also be signed by BACC trainer and forwarded to Church Engineer for final review and approval. d. Final payment will not be made until checklist has been received, reviewed, and approved by Church Engineer. 3. At completion of work, turn over CD copy of data bases and control record drawings for systems to Church Engineering. END OF SECTION 230900 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel -220038 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 26 0500 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections of these specifications. 4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. 5. Furnish and install temperature control system specified in Division 23. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts and templates for equipment bases only. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 02: Criteria for performance of excavating and backfilling. 2. Section 07840: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Section 259500: Building Automation And Control Commissioning Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide following information for each item of equipment - a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings. c. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number e. Name of local supplier. 2. Furnish such information for following equipment - a. Wiring devices. b. Disconnects. c. Transformers. d. Panelboards. e. Motor starters. 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel f. Motor control centers. g. Conductors and cables. h. Lighting fixtures, poles, and associated control equipment. i. Medium voltage equipment. j. Conductors and cables. k. Dimming Equipment. 3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit on following equipment - a. Panelboards b. Motor Control Centers c. Dimming Equipment d. Low Voltage Relay Lighting Panel e. Seismic Supports and Restraints f. Transformers 2. Indicate precise equipment to be used, including all options specified, installation instructions dimensions, support method, etc. Indicate wording and format of nameplates where applicable. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover. C. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. D. Closeout 1. Operations And Maintenance Manual Data - a. Modify and add to requirements of General Requirements as follows - 1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. 2) Include copy of approved shop drawings. 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel E. Submittal Checklist: C A T A L O G C U T S T E C H N I C A L D A T A S H O P D R A W I N G S L E T T E R O F C E R T S A M P L E C O L O R S E L E C T I O N C O N T R O L D I A G R A M W I R I N G D I A G R A M S T E S T R E S U L T S O & M M A N U A L S M I X P R O P O R T I O N S 260121 Outlet Boxes X X X X 260160 Fuses X X X 260500 Warranty X 260510 O&M Manual X 260513 Wiring X X 260526 Grounding Assemblies X X X 260533 Conduit X X X X 260533 Bushings X X X 260534 Outlet Boxes X X X 260534 Junction Boxes X X X X 260534 Junction & Pull Boxes X X X 260534 Conduit Bodies X X X 260548 Seismic Controls X X X 260553 Nameplates X X X 260553 Wire Markers X X X 260553 Conduit Markers X X X 260553 Labels X X X X 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 260620 Receptacles X X X X 260620 Wall Switches X X X X 260620 Wall Plates X X X X 261000 Branch Circuit Panelboard X X X 261839 Motors X X X X 261839 Motor Controls X X X X X X 261839 Motor Starters X X X X X 262813 Fuses X X X 262816 Safety Switches X X X 263100 Fire Alarm System / Fire Reporting System X X X X X X X X 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer: 1. Section 261216: Transformers. C. Pre-installation Meeting 1. Prior to commencement of work specified in Division 26 and appropriate Division 23 Sections conduct pre-installation meetings with Project Manager, Contractor, Electrical Contractor and his sub-trades, and item or system suppliers / installers. 2. Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for particular activity including, but not limited to- requirements for coordination between sections, Deliveries, Compatibility of materials, space and access limitations, Governing regulations, testing requirements, protection, and pre-commissioning of building systems 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for three days to train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served prior to installation or rough-in. a. Notify Engineer of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Mounting Heights 1. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor. Field coordinate with Architectural drawings, Architect and field conditions for exact placement. a. Temperature Control Junction Boxes - As indicated on Drawings b. Thermostats - As indicated on Drawings c. Remote Temperature Sensors - 56 inches to top d. Condensing Unit Disconnects - Top same height as top of unit e. Other Motor Disconnects - 60 inches f. Distribution Panels - 72 inches to top g. Receptacles - 18 inches h. Switches - 42 inches i. Wall-Mounted Exit Lights - 90 inches k. Sound / Satellite / TV Distribution System Components: As indicated on Drawings. l. Computer and TV: 18 inches or at 7’-0” for wall mounted T.V.’s. m. Electric Water Cooler Outlets: Mount so outlet and cord are hidden by water cooler. 01 October 2021 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel n. Motor controls: 60 inches. o. Telephone / Data Terminal Boards: 72 inches. p. Telephones (wall type): 48 inches 1 200 mm [60 inches on D I Stores]. q. Telephones (desk type): 18 inches. r. Telephone / Data (desk type): 18 inches. s. TV Outlets: 18 inches or at 7’-0” for wall mounted T.V.’s. t. Clock Displays (Session Status): 66 inches. u. Endowment Room Panels: 60 inches. v. Signal Chimes: 84 inches. 2. Refer special conditions to Engineer before rough-in and locate outlet under his direction. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests - Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Engineer prior to test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplates current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 260510 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 26 0510 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-26 General Electrical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish four sets of bound operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS A. General: 1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" (Electrical and Instrumentation) is a bound compilation of drawings and data that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals, complete with drawings and data, shall be furnished to the Owner. 2. The electrical CONTRACTOR has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data and compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or equipment purchased by the Owner and delivered to the CONTRACTOR for installation. 3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2 A. 4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed. B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAGE SIZE: A. All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 16 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 260510 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.2 DRAWINGS: A. All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x 11" manila pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manila pocket. 2.3 BINDERS: A. Binders shall be Buckram (stiffened fabric), bar-lock type binders with block lettering for sheet size 8-1/2 x 11 inches with 2" to 3-1/2" expandable metal capacity as required for the project. The number of binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 4". B. Place the following information on the front cover and backbone: 1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual". 2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume). Project Number 3. Building name and number. 4. Architect's name. 5. ENGINEER's name. 6. General CONTRACTOR's name. 7. Electrical CONTRACTOR's name. Items 5 through 7 need not be printed on the backbone. 2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation. B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section additional indexing of component parts may be required. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows: 1. Copy of purchase order change (if any). 2. Outline drawings, special construction details, as built electrical wiring and control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems. 3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves. 4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan number. 01 October 2021 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 260510 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included. 6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model numbers and plan symbols. 7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into the following suggested parts: Part I Building and System Descriptions Part II Purchased Equipment Data Part III Test Reports and Charts Part IV Start-Up and Operation Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations Part VI Software/Programming Data/Program CD’s 8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment. 9. A copy of all testing reports. 10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol. 11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained. 12. Copies of developed software, programmed set points, screens, etc. on C.D. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less. 3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 4. Armored cable, Type AC, rated 600 V or less. 5. Photovoltaic cable, Type PV, rated 2000 V or less. 6. Mineral-insulated cable, Type MI, rated 600 V or less. 7. Tray cable, Type TC, rated 600 V or less. 8. Fire-alarm wire and cable. 9. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 601 to 35,000 V. 2. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables. 3. Section 271313 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 4. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. PV: Photovoltaic. B. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. VFC: Variable-frequency controller. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, stranded copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden Inc. 2. Cerro Wire LLC. 3. Encore Wire Corporation. 4. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 5. Okonite Company (The). 6. Service Wire Co. 7. Southwire Company. 8. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719. 2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 3. Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83 for interior wiring. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44 for all exterior or underground wiring. F. Shield: 1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFDs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. 2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 2. Okonite Company (The). 3. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Circuits: 1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel E. Conductors: Stranded Copper, complying with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. F. Ground Conductor: Insulated. G. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. H. Armor: Steel, interlocked. I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor. 2.3 TRAY CABLE, TYPE TC A. Description: A factory assembly of insulated current-carrying conductors with or without an equipment grounding conductor in a nonmetallic jacket. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden Inc. 2. Encore Wire Corporation. 3. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 4. Okonite Company (The). 5. Southwire Company. 6. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Comply with UL 1277. 4. Comply with ICEA S-73-532/NEMA WC 57 for Type TC cables used for control, thermocouple extension, and instrumentation. 5. Comply with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC 70 for Type TC cables used for power distribution. 6. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Stranded Copper, complying and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. E. Ground Conductor: Insulated. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel F. Conductor Insulation: Type XHHW-2. Comply with UL 44. G. Shield: None. 2.4 FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Wire & Cable Inc. 2. CommScope, Inc. 3. Comtran Corporation. 4. Draka Cableteq USA; a Prysmian Group company. 5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 6. Radix Wire. 7. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. West Penn Wire. B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire-alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a two-hour rating. D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a two-hour rating. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, in pathway. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, in pathway. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire-alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.5 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper Bronze. 2. Type: Two hole with long barrels. 3. Termination: Crimp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper, stranded for all conductor sizes. B. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be stranded copper for No. 8 AWG and smaller. C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for all sizes. D. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for all sizes. E. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes. F. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway, only as approved by Engineer. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway only as approved by Engineer. C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC. E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG Metal-clad cable, Type MC. F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC only as approved by Engineer. H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. I. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC only as approved by Engineer. J. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG Metal-clad cable, Type MC. K. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. L. VFD Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit Type TC-ER cable with braided shield. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRING A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal pathway according to Section 270528.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems." 1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire-alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated pathway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and pathways used for fire-alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of two-hour, fire-rated fire-alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire-alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or pathway as signaling line circuits. D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire-alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color- code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire-alarm system junction boxes and covers red. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire-alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the fire-alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack. D. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.7 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.8 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. D. Perform tests and inspections. 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors. E. CABLE TESTING PROCEDURES 1. Cables shall be megger tested. Each cable shall be megger tested on an individual basis. 2. Grouping of phase conductors for a group measurement shall not be permitted. 3. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps, and connections are made except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. 4. Insulation resistance of conductors which are to operate at 600 volts or less shall be tested by using Biddle (or approved equal) Megger with an output of not less than 1000 volts d.c. Conductors shall be tested between phase conductors, between each phase conductor and neutral and ground, and between neutral and ground. Reading shall be observed after 15 seconds of operation of the Megger. Insulation resistance of conductors rated at 0-250 volts shall be tested at 500 volts and shall be not less than fifty (50) mega-ohms (50,000,000 ohms), 251-600 volt conductors shall be tested at 1000 volts and shall be not less than one hundred (100) mega ohms (100,000,000 ohms), or the latest NEMA (IPCEA) Standard requirement for the conductor type or governing Code, whichever is more stringent. 5. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests. 6. Contractor shall tabulate readings observed and shall forward four copies of test readings to the Engineer for review. These test reports shall identify each conductor tested, date and time of test, test equipment utilized (make, model and serial number) and its latest date of certification. Each test shall be signed by party making the test. Any conductor, splice or end device which is found defective shall be promptly removed and replaced, and additional tests shall be performed. 7. The above testing and report requirements shall apply to all No.14 and larger conductors. Conductors control circuits and signal circuits shall be checked in accordance with the California Electrical Code. If values are less than the minimum values noted above in paragraph 4, the feeder conductors, splices and/or devices shall be removed and replaced with conductors of identical size and retested. 8. If all tests are acceptable, the contractor shall terminate conductors to circuit breaker, neutral bar and ground bar and energize the circuit in the manner noted in the able below. 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 9. Field Voltage Testing: a. Check each end device (every receptacle) with a voltmeter. Following are acceptable results: 1) Approximately 120 Volts between Phase and neutral 2) Approximately 120 Volts between Phase and neutral 10. Results shall be tabulated in a table similar to below: PANEL DESIGNATION: UL4A LOCATION: West Closet A CIRCUIT LOAD CKT. CONF. OUTLET TEST WIRE SIZE AMPS MEGOHMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 01 October 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 11. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 12. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. F. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of system described in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1) Test wells. 2) Ground rods. 3) Ground rings. 4) Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. b. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS NFPA 70B. 1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ERICO; a brand of nVent. 2. Hubbell Incorporated (Construction and Energy Group). 3. ILSCO. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) 12” Long or as needed, in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals. E. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. F. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. G. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. H. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. J. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel K. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections. L. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw. M. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. N. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp. O. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. P. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts. a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy. b. Listed for direct burial. 2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct burial. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m). B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long. 2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material. C. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, 250kcmil minimum. 1. Bury at least 30 inches (750 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. F. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned- copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned- copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation. 3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. H. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor. 3.6 FENCE GROUNDING A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 500 feet (150 m) except as follows: 1. Fences within 100 Feet (30 m) of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 250 feet (75 m). a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 1) Bond metal gates to gate posts. 2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except at openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches (460 mm) below finished grade. B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet (45 m) on each side of crossing. C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless otherwise indicated. D. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches (150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location. E. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame. F. Bonding to Lightning-Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning-protection down conductor or lightning-protection grounding conductor, complying with NFPA 780. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.7 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover. 1. Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod extending around the perimeter of area or item indicated. 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than 250kcmil for ground ring and for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation. J. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 50 feet (15 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than 250 kcmil. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 50 feet (15 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. K. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet (6.0 m) long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length. L. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. D. Perform tests and inspections. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. F. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 01 October 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. I. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Aluminum slotted support systems. 3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 4. Conduit and cable support devices. 5. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 6. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints. 7. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 8. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Sockets. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel e. Eye nuts. f. Fasteners. g. Anchors. h. Saddles. i. Brackets. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer in the state of the project. For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems. 1. Hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Slotted support systems. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1. Include design calculations and details of hangers. 2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Ductwork, piping, fittings, and supports. 3. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Projectors. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system. B. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. CADDY; a brand of nVent. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. Gripple Inc. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria or 1-5/8 inches (41.25 mm) or 1-1/4 inches (31.75 mm) or 13/16 inches (20.64 mm). 5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 6. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 8. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded-aluminum channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Flex-Strut Inc. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 4. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria or 1-5/8 inches (41.25 mm) or 1-1/4 inches (31.75 mm) or 13/16 inches (20.64 mm). 6. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 8. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria or 1-5/8 inches (41.25 mm) or 1-1/4 inches (31.75 mm) or 13/16 inches (20.64 mm). 4. Fittings and Accessories: Products provided by channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as those for channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. 7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) B-line, an Eaton business. 2) Hilti, Inc. 3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M). 6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 102. 4. NECA 105. 5. NECA 111. B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70, as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 01 October 2021 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances. 2. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior duct banks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 3. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Sustainable Design Submittals: C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. Opti-Com Manufacturing Network, Inc (OMNI). c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Plasti-Bond. e. Southwire Company. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. h. Wheatland Tube Company. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 5. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 6. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 7. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 8. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 9. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Plasti-Bond. e. Southwire Company. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Wheatland Tube Company. 2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 6. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel b. Type: Setscrew 7. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Cantex Inc. c. CertainTeed Corporation. d. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. e. Hubbell Incorporated (Commercial and Industrial Group - RACO). f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Topaz Electric; a division of Topaz Lighting Corp. h. United Fiberglass of America (UFA). 2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fiberglass: a. Comply with NEMA TC 14. b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways. 4. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 5. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC or fiberglass complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 6. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 7. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 8. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 9. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D3485. 10. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14. B. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. d. Condux International, Inc. e. Hubbell Incorporated (Commercial and Industrial Group - RACO). f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. United Fiberglass of America (UFA). 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Hoffman; a brand of nVent. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R or Type 4 or Type 12 as indicated, unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or Screw-cover type or Flanged-and-gasketed type as appropriate for the type of enclosure. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a brand of nVent. 3. Lamson & Sessions. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless- steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated (Commercial and Industrial Group - Wiring Device- Kellems). b. MonoSystems, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated. b. MonoSystems, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of nVent. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Hubbell Incorporated (Commercial and Industrial Group - RACO). 9. Hubbell Incorporated (Commercial and Industrial Group - Wiring Device-Kellems). 10. Kraloy Fittings. 11. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 12. MonoSystems, Inc. 13. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 14. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 15. Plasti-Bond. 16. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 17. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 18. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 19. Topaz Electric; a division of Topaz Lighting Corp. 20. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast Metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg). 1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. M. Device Box Dimensions: 4 11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (119 mm square by 60 mm deep) N. Gangable boxes are allowed. O. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R or Type 4 Type 12 as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. P. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R as indicated galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Hubbell Incorporated (Power Systems Group - Quazite). c. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of cast iron or fiberglass. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Hubbell Incorporated (Power Systems Group - Quazite). 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. e. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. f. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC or IMC or EMT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried or concrete-encased as indicated. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms or tunnels below 4’ A.F.F. d. Gymnasiums. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C) 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. Data Conduits shall use long sweep elbows. J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. K. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. L. Any bend in buried PVC conduit over 22 degrees shall be Fiberglass or PVC coated GRC. Use threaded adapters to PVC. M. Conduits embedded in concrete shall be PVC. N. Use PVC coated GRC to penetrate any wall or manhole opening. O. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 14 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. P. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. Q. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. R. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. S. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. T. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. U. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. V. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. W. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. X. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Y. Surface Raceways: 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 15 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. Z. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. AA. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. BB. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. CC. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 16 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. DD. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches (915 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations whether or not subject to severe physical damage. EE. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. FF. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. GG. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. HH. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. II. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. JJ. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. KK. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. LL. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 17 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct- buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 36” below grade. E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. 01 October 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533- 18 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install 0sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire- resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 01 October 2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40. D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm). 2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. BWM Company. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Metraflex Company (The). e. OZ Gedney. f. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 5. Any sealing devices in walls shall seal against PVC coated GRC through wall. Thence continue with PVC conduit. 01 October 2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. HOLDRITE; Reliance Worldwide Company. 2.4 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire- rated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 01 October 2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. 01 October 2021 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260548.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Restraint channel bracings. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Seismic-restraint accessories. 4. Mechanical anchor bolts. 5. Adhesive anchor bolts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device. 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select seismic and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 3. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. Electrical components include: 1. Control and monitoring panels. 2. Generators. 3. Luminaires. 4. Motor control centers. 5. Panelboards. 6. Photovoltaic system components. 7. Substations. 8. Switchboards. 9. Switchgear. 10. Transformers. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 11. Unit substations. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. E. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 105. 2. Building Classification Category: III. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal. B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): see Structural Drawings. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: see Structural Drawings. 2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CADDY; a brand of nVent. 2. Gripple Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables. D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. 2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488. 2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. F. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. C. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 01 October 2021 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate composition, size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E requirements for arc-flash warning labels. F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 240-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. 4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. 5. Color for Neutral: White for 208V or gray for 480V. 6. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 7. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with two or more yellow stripes. C. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. E. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." F. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field. 2.3 LABELS A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Champion America. c. emedco. d. Grafoplast Wire Markers. e. HellermannTyton. f. LEM Products Inc. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel g. Marking Services, Inc. h. Panduit Corp. i. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. HellermannTyton. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brother International Corporation. c. emedco. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. Panduit Corp. f. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 3. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 4. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer. D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brother International Corporation. c. emedco. d. Grafoplast Wire Markers. e. Ideal Industries, Inc. f. Panduit Corp. g. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches (37 by 150 mm) for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 BANDS AND TUBES A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. HellermannTyton. c. Panduit Corp. B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Panduit Corp. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. Ideal Industries, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers placed diagonally over orange background and are 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brimar Industries, Inc. b. HellermannTyton. c. LEM Products Inc. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Ideal Industries, Inc. d. LEM Products Inc. e. Marking Services, Inc. f. Reef Industries, Inc. g. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground (BP-1) utility lines. b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. d. Shall be foil-backed so as to be traceable/detectable. Stub into pull boxes, gear, etc. as practicable for tracer connection. 3. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE". c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE". 4. Trench Marking: a. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright-colored, continuous- printed on one side, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel c. Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm). d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). e. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m). f. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 300 lbf (1334 N) and 12,500 psi (86.1 MPa). F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm). 2.6 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self- locking cable tie fastener. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Grafoplast Wire Markers. e. LEM Products Inc. f. Marking Services, Inc. g. Panduit Corp. h. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. C. Write-on Tags: 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brimar Industries, Inc. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. LEM Products Inc. d. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Polyester Tags: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 4. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.7 SIGNS A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 3. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 4. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Champion America. c. emedco. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel d. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396- inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 3. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 4. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. emedco. d. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.8 CABLE TIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. HellermannTyton. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Marking Services, Inc. 4. Panduit Corp. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. D. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables over 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer load shedding. K. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. L. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS." M. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. N. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. O. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. P. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Q. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. R. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. S. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. T. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. U. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. V. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions. W. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 2. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 3. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 14 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel X. Metal Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. Y. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. Z. Write-on Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. AA. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches (50 mm) high. BB. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. CC. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. DD. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 15 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil. Stencil legend "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH-VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm- ) high, black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals. D. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Vinyl wraparound labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. E. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. F. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS." G. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels to identify the phase. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 16 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel I. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. J. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation. K. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors. L. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. M. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable. N. Concealed Raceways and Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Apply floor marking tape to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. O. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. P. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors. Q. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. R. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. S. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 17 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel T. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. U. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self- adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power-transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. 01 October 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 18 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specification-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. USB receptacles. 3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 4. SPD receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 5. Hazardous (classified) location receptacles. 6. Twist-locking receptacles. 7. Pendant cord-connector devices. 8. Cord and plug sets. 9. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 10. Decorator-style devices, 20 A. 11. Occupancy sensors. 12. Digital timer light switches. 13. Wall-box dimmers. 14. Wall plates. 15. Floor service fittings. 16. Poke-through assemblies. 17. Prefabricated multioutlet assemblies. 18. Service poles. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter. B. BAS: Building automation system. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. G. SPD: Surge protective device. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. RoHS compliant. D. Comply with NEMA WD 1. E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. G. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Almond Black Brown Gray Ivory White As selected by Architect. Coordinate each room with Architect. Unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red. 3. SPD Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 SPECIFICATION-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Hubble 2152 2. Leyrton 16252 3. Pass & Seymour 26252 4. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 5. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 6. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. 7. Coordinate color for each room with Architect. B. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Match indoor receptacles. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article. C. Tamper-Resistant Duplex and USB Charging Receptacles: 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel- plated, brass mounting strap. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the line voltage receptacle. 3. Line Voltage Receptacles: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. USB Receptacles: Dual USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 1310, USB 3.0 devices, and FS W-C-596. 6. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article. 2.3 GFCI SPECIFICATION-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Match general receptacles. 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Coordinate color with Architect. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. B. Weather-Resistant, GFCI Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Hubble GF5252, Leviton 6599, Pass & Seymour 1591. 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Square face. Coordinate color with Architect. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. 4. Type: Feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and UL 943 Class A. 6. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" articles. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2.4 SPD RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex SPD Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Match general receptacles. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. LED indicator light. 3. SPD Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 4. Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service." 5. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 6. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596. 2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 120 V, 20 A. 1. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Daniel Woodhead. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. B. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 250 V, 20 A. 1. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Daniel Woodhead. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L6-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. C. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 277 V, 20 A. 1. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Daniel Woodhead. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L7-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. D. Twist-Lock, Isolated-Ground, Single Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Daniel Woodhead. 2. Grounding: Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 2.6 CLOCK WANGE OUTLET A. Description: Recessed receptacle body with clock hook, specification grade. B. Pass & Seymour 53713 C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-15R. D. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. 2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green- insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.8 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 1. Hubbell 2121, Leviton 5621, Pass & Seymour 2621. 2. Description: Rectangular face, Designer Style. Coordinate design and color with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 1. Hubbell 2121, Leviton 5621, Pass & Seymour 2621. 2. Description: Rectangular face, Designer Style. Coordinate design and color with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. C. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 1. Hubbell 2121, Leviton 5621, Pass & Seymour 2621. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Description: Rectangular face, Designer Style. Coordinate design and color with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. D. Pilot-Light, Three-way Switches: 120/277 V, 20 . 1. Manufacturers: Match general switches. 2. Description: Illuminated when switch is on. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. E. Lighted Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 1. Manufacturers: Match general switches. 2. Description: Handle illuminated when switch is on. 3. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 1. Hubbell HBL1221, Leviton 122-2IL, Pass & Seymour 20ACI-L. 2. Description: Factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. Coordinate design with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. G. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Leviton 5657-2. 2. Description: For use with mechanically held lighting contactors. Single pole AC quiet commercial specification grade self- grading back & side wined. Coordinate design and color with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 2.9 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES, 20 A A. Decorator Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 1. Manufacturers: Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. B. Decorator Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article. C. Decorator, Tamper- and Weather-Resistant, Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour. 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" and "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" articles. D. Decorator Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour. 2. Comply with UL 20. E. Decorator Single-Pole Lighted Switches,120/277 V, 20 A 1. Manufacturers: Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour. 2. Description: Square face illuminated when circuit is switched off. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 2.10 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology 1. Manufacturer: Unenco, Leviton, Wattstopper, Hubbell. 2. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using dual (ultrasonic and passive infrared) technology. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 4. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Adjustable time delay of 20 minutes. 6. Able to be locked to Automatic or Manual-On mode. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux). 8. Connections: Provisions for connection to BAS. 9. Connections: RJ-45 communications outlet. 10. Connections: Integral wireless networking. B. Wall Sensor Light Switch, Passive Infrared 1. Unenco IWS-ZP-120, Leviton ODS10-10, Wattstopper WT-100-W. 2. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination, lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using passive infrared technology. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 4. Connections: Provisions for connection to BAS. 5. Connections: Hard wired. 6. Rated 800 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V a c for motor. 7. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 8. Adjustable time delay of up to 30 minutes. 9. Able to be locked to Manual - On mode. 10. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux). C. Wall Sensor Light Switch, Ultrasonic 1. Tork 5C20 with TRPI relay, Unenco C-500-800 with 211-QTI relay, Watt Stopper W- 500A with A120EP relay. 2. Description: Ceiling-mounted, combination, lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using ultrasonic technology. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 4. Connections: Provisions for connection to BAS. 5. Rated 800 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac for motor. 6. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 7. Adjustable time delay of up to 30 minutes. 8. Able to be locked to Manual - On mode. 9. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux). 2.11 TIMER LIGHT SWITCH A. Digital Timer Light Switch 1. Manufacturers: Hubbel, Leviton, Pass & Seymour. 2. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting-control unit, with backlit digital display, with selectable time interval in 10- minute increments. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 4. Rated 800 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac for motor. 5. Integral relay for connection to BAS. B. Fan-Speed Controls 1. Approved manufacturer and Model: W-1411 by Casablanca Pomona, CA (909) 629- 0958. 2. Description: Coordinate design and color with Architect. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 1917. 2.12 TV WALL JACKS 1. Approved manufacturers and models: Hubble CX 11, CFPMA-I & Leviton 40681-I. 2. Description: Type F TU wall jack. Coordinate design and color with Architect. 2.13 DIMMERS A. Wall-Box Dimmers: 1. Hubbell, Levtion, Pass & Seymour. 2. Description: Modular, full-wave, solid-state dimmer switch with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 3. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 1472. 5. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel a. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devicesRetain "Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches" Subparagraph below with compatible dimming-type ballasts. Coordinate with Section 265116 "Fluorescent Interior Lighting" or Section 265119 "LED Interior Lighting." Use lamp and ballast, if applicable, types to obtain consistent dimming characteristics. 6. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. Fully off in the OFF position. 2.14 WALL PLATES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Coordinate plate color with Architect. Nylon. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, High Impact Nylon. Coordinate color with Architect and match wiring device. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. Coordinate cover style with Architect. C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant with lockable cover, weather proof mats, and corrosion resistant metal plate. Coordinate design L style with Architect. 1. Approved Manufacturer models: a. Hubbell CWP26H, horizontal; WP26, vertical. b. Leviton 4990, horizontal; 4992, vertical. c. Pass & Seymour WPH26, horizontal; WP26, vertical. 2.15 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Flush-Type Floor Service Fittings: 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used, with cover flush with finished floor. 3. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 4. Service Plate and Cover: Rectangular or Round, solid brass with satin finish. Coordinate style with Architect. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted pair cable, complying with requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling." 2.16 COMPONENTS A. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non-hardening sealant. B. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors: 1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors. 2. Acceptable Products: a. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL (800) 847-7500 or (847) 937-2600. www.squared.com b. 16323 by Bussman Div of Cooper Industries, St Louis, MO (800) 937-4600 or (314) 394-2877. www.bussman.com c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Division 01. 2.17 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service- outlet assembly. B. Manufacturers: Hubbel, Wiremold. C. Standards: Comply with scrub water exclusion requirements in UL 514. D. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks, complying with requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling." E. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. F. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel G. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor. H. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 14 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. 2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device, listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 01 October 2021 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 15 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. C. Essential Electrical System: Mark receptacles supplied from the essential electrical system to allow easy identification using a self-adhesive label. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. D. Tests for Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 116 to 124 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 3 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) listing for series rating of installed devices. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel D. Comply with NFPA 70. 2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Fuses: Bassman, Edison Fusegear, GEC Alsthom, Littel fuse. B. Switches: Same as manufacturer of project’s main panel board. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty: 1. Single throw. 2. Three pole. 3. 600-V ac. 4. 1200 A and smaller 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.4 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Same as manufacturer of Project’s main panel board. B. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.5 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES A. Bussman, Square D, Eaton, GE, Siemens. B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with Class J fuse block and 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating. C. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Three Pole, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 600-V ac, Amperage as incidated. A; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; integral shunt trip mechanism; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer source of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, pilot, indicating and control devices. E. Accessories: 1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function. 2. Oiltight red ON pilot light. 3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating. 4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and closed. 5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped. 6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay 24-V dc coil voltage. 7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72. 8. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 9. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 10. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 11. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating 120-V ac. 12. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 13. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 14. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.6 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Same manufacturer as breakers in main panel board. B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area. C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes. D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated. E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position. F. Lugs shall be suitable for the 167 deg F (75 deg C) temperature rating in NFPA 70. G. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. I. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response. K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. L. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. M. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). N. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). O. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero- sequence current transformer/sensor. 2.7 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES A. Same manufacturer as panel boards. B. Description: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. C. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. D. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: a. Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. b. Lugs shall be suitable for the 167 deg F (75 deg C) temperature rating in NFPA 70. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. 2.8 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1) indoor gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvanized steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12) outdoor. C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts. NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both endwalls. D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall directly operable through the front cover of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 1) directly operable through the dead front trim of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 3R). The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7. B. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. C. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install fuses in fusible devices. G. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections for Switches: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. i. Verify correct phase barrier installation. j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage." C. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units. h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600- V rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less than two megohms. e. Determine the following by primary current injection: 1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current injection. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall be as indicated by manufacturer. h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators; zone interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-free, anti-pump function; and trip unit battery condition. Reset all trip logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not function as designed. i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not function as designed. 01 October 2021 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 13 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Coordination Studies”. END OF SECTION 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 1 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel SECTION 265113 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires: 1. Cylinder. 2. Downlight. 3. Linear industrial. 4. Recessed, linear. 5. Strip light. 6. Surface mount, linear. 7. Suspended, linear. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 2 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-applied finish. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire. 1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 3 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 7. Moldings. B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. E. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: Five for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: Five for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 4 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. E. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." C. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 104 deg F. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 5 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent. 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI. C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. F. California Title 24 compliant. 2.3 CYLINDER A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac. B. Lamp: 1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 2. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. 3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 5. Internal driver. 6. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 7. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 6 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Prismatic acrylic Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. E. With integral mounting provisions. F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 2.4 DOWNLIGHT A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac. B. Lamp: 1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 2. CRI of 80. CCT of 3000 K. 3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 5. Internal driver. 6. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 7. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Clear anodized powder-coat painted finish. 3. Universal mounting bracket. 4. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 7 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Fixed lens. 2. Wide light distribution. 3. Prismatic acrylic Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 4. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 5. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 6. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. 2.5 STRIP LIGHT A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac. B. Lamp: 1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 2. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. 3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 5. Internal driver. 6. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 7. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. powder-coat painted finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping of luminaire without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. E. Diffusers and Globes: 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 8 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 2.6 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR Retain this article for surface-mounted, linear-style luminaires with a housing, reflector, and/or lens in applications, such stairwell or passageway lighting. A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac. B. Lamp: 1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 2. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. 3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 5. Internal driver. 6. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 7. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. powder-coat painted finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 9 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 2.7 SUSPENDED, LINEAR A. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac. B. Lamp: 1. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W. 2. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. 3. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 4. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 5. Internal driver. 6. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 7. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. powder-coat painted finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. F. Standards: 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 10 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 2.8 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 11 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls Attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members Attached using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. G. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Mount: a. Two 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports 10 feet in length. b. Pendant mount Four-point pendant mount with 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 10 feet in length. c. Hook mount. 2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 01 October 2021 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 265113 - 12 The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints Rexburg Idaho Temple, Confirmation & Initiatory Remodel 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls." B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls." 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION